About This Manual

About this Manual
We’ve added this manual to the Agilent website in an effort to help you support
your product. This manual is the best copy we could find; it may be incomplete
or contain dated information. If we find a more recent copy in the future, we will
add it to the Agilent website.
Support for Your Product
Agilent no longer sells or supports this product. Our service centers may be able
to perform calibration if no repair parts are needed, but no other support from
Agilent is available. You will find any other available product information on the
Agilent Test & Measurement website, www.tm.agilent.com.
HP References in this Manual
This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett-Packard. Please note that

Hewlett-Packard's former test and measurement, semiconductor products and
chemical analysis businesses are now part of Agilent Technologies. We have
made no changes to this manual copy. In other documentation, to reduce
potential confusion, the only change to product numbers and names has been in
the company name prefix: where a product number/name was HP XXXX the
current name/number is now Agilent XXXX. For example, model number
HP8648A is now model number Agilent 8648A.
User’s and Calibration Guide
HP ESA-L1500A Spectrum Analyzer
HP Part No. E4411-90056 Supersedes E4411-90054

Printed in USA
April 1999
© Copyright 1997, 1998, 1999 Hewlett-Packard Company

The information contained in this document is subject to change
without notice.
Hewlett-Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this
material, including but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Hewlett-Packard
shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or
consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance,
or use of this material.
The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual.
Familiarize yourself with the symbols and their meaning before
operating this instrument.
WARNING Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure

which, if not correctly performed or adhered to, could result in
injury or loss of life. Do not proceed beyond a warning note
until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
WARNING This is a Safety Class 1 Product (provided with a protective

earthing ground incorporated in the power cord). The mains
plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a
protected earth contact. Any interruption of the protective
conductor inside or outside of the product is likely to make the
product dangerous. Intentional interruption is prohibited.
WARNING If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided

by the equipment could be impaired. This product must be used
in a normal condition (in which all means for protection are
intact) only.
2
CAUTION Caution denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure that, if not
correctly performed or adhered to, could result in damage to or
destruction of the instrument. Do not proceed beyond a caution sign
until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met.
The instruction documentation symbol. The product is marked

with this symbol when it is necessary for the user to refer to the
instructions in the documentation.
This symbol is used to mark the on position of the power line

switch.
This symbol is used to mark the standby position of the power line
switch.
This symbol indicates that the input power required is AC.
Warranty
This Hewlett-Packard instrument product is warranted against defects
in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of
shipment. During the warranty period, Hewlett-Packard Company will,
at its option, either repair or replace products which prove to be
defective.
For warranty service or repair, this product must be returned to a
service facility designated by Hewlett-Packard. Buyer shall prepay
shipping charges to Hewlett-Packard and Hewlett-Packard shall pay
shipping charges to return the product to Buyer. However, Buyer shall
pay all shipping charges, duties, and taxes for products returned to
Hewlett-Packard from another country.
Hewlett-Packard warrants that its software and firmware designated
by Hewlett-Packard for use with an instrument will execute its
programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument.
Hewlett-Packard does not warrant that the operation of the
instrument, or software, or firmware will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
3
LIMITATION OF WARRANTY
The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from
improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer, Buyer-supplied
software or interfacing, unauthorized modification or misuse, operation
outside of the environmental specifications for the product, or improper
site preparation or maintenance.
NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED.
HEWLETT-PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES
THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER’S SOLE AND
EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES. HEWLETT-PACKARD SHALL NOT BE
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT,
TORT, OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY.
4
Contents
1. Preparing for Use and Printing

Initial Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Power Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Checking the Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Power Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Turning on the Analyzer for the First Time. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Printing with HP-IB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Printing Using an HP-IB Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Interconnection and Printing Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Printing with RS-232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Printing Using an RS-232 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Printing With a Parallel Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Selecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
How to Select a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Defining a Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
2. Getting Started
What You’ll Find in this Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Front Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Data Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Knob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Numeric Keypad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Step Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Rear Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Screen Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Key Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Making a Measurement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
Measurement Summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Analyzer Accuracy and the Internal Alignment Process. . . . . . . . . . . 44
Warm-Up Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Analyzer Battery Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
3. Troubleshooting
What You’ll Find in This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Before You Call Hewlett-Packard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Check the Basics. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Read the Warranty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
How to Call Hewlett-Packard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
How to Return Your Analyzer for Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Service Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Original Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Other Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
5
Contents
4. Front-Panel Key Reference

Amplitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Auto Couple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Brightness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
BW/Avg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Det/Demod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Enter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Esc. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Freq Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Measure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
More . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Peak Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Preset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Search . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97
Single Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Source Amptd. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Standby. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Sweep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
System (Local) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Trace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Trig . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5. Menu Maps
6. Options and Accessories

Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Operating and Carrying Case (Option AYT and
Option AYU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Transit Case (Option AXT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
12 Vdc Power Cable (Option A5D) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
75 Ω Input Impedance (Option 1DP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Tracking Generator (Option 1DN and
Option 1DQ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
IF, Sweep, and Video Inputs and Outputs
(Option A4J) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
HP-IB and Parallel Interface (Option A4H) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
RS-232 and Parallel Interface (Option 1AX). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Front Panel Protective Cover (Option UK9) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
50 Ω to 75 Ω Matching Pad (Option 1D7) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Rack Mount Kit With Handles (Option 1CP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
User’s Guide and Calibration Guide (Option 0B1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Service Documentation (Option 0BX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6
Contents
Commercial Calibration with Test Data

(Option UK6). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Benchlink Spectrum Analyzer Screen Capture Software (Option B70)
140
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
RF and Transient Limiters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
50 Ω/75 Ω Minimum Loss Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
75 Ω Matching Transformer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
RF Bridges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
AC Power Source . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Snap on Rechargeable Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
AC Probe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Broadband Preamplifiers and Power Amplifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Carrying Strap (HP part number E4411-60028) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
External Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
HP-IB Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Parallel Interface Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
RS-232 Cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
7. Specifications
About This Chapter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Amplitude. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Tracking Generator Specifications (Option 1DN or 1DQ) . . . . . . . 161
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Inputs and Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Regulatory Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
8. Required Equipment
Test Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Periodically verifying operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
9. Performance Verification Tests

....................................................... 188
Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
1. 10 MHz Reference Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
2. Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
3. Noise Sidebands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Additional Equipment for 75 Ω Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7
Contents
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Part 1: Noise Sideband Suppression at 10 kHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Part 4: Noise Sideband Suppression at 100 kHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4. System Related Sidebands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
5. Residual FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Part 1: Residual FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Determining the IF Filter Slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Measuring the Residual FM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
6. Frequency Span Readout Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Full Span Frequency Span Readout Accuracy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
100 kHz and 100 MHz Frequency Span Readout Accuracy . . . . . . 210
7. Reference Level Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Log Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Linear Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
8. Scale Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Calculate Actual Attenuation Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Log Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Setup for Log Scale Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Measure Cumulative Log Fidelity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Calculate Incremental Log Fidelity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Linear Scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Setup for Linear Scale Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Calculate Ideal Marker Amplitude . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Measure Linear Fidelity. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
9. Input Attenuation Switching Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Calculate Actual Attenuation Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Setup for Switching Uncertainty Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Measure Switching Uncertainty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
10. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
8
Contents

Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
3 dB Bandwidths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
11. Frequency Readout and Marker Count Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Part 1: Frequency Readout Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Part 2: Marker Count Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
12. Absolute Amplitude Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Procedure: Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Measurement . . . . . . . . 240
13. Frequency Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Procedure, Part 1, System Characterization for
75 Ω Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Procedure, Part 2, Frequency Response, ≥ 100 kHz . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Frequency Response, < 100 kHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Test Results. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
14. Spurious Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Part 1: Second Harmonic Distortion, 40 MHz. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Part 2: Third Order Intermodulation Distortion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
15. Gain Compression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
16. Other Input Related Spurious Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
17. Sweep Time Accuracy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
18. Displayed Average Noise Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
400 kHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
1 MHz to 10 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
10 MHz to 500 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
500 MHz to 1.2 GHz (75 Ω Inputs: 500 MHz to
9
Contents
1.0 GHz). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

1.2 GHz to 1.5 GHz (75 Ω Inputs: 1.0 GHz to
1.5 GHz). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
19. Residual Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
150 kHz to 1 MHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
1 MHz to 1.5 GHz . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
20. Tracking Generator Feedthrough Options IDN and IDQ . . . . . . 283
Additional Equipment Required For 75 Ω RF Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
21. Absolute Amplitude, Vernier, and Power Sweep Accuracy, Options
1DN and 1DQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Additional Equipment Required for 75 Ω RF Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
22. Tracking Generator Level Flatness, Options 1DN and 1DQ. . . . 292
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
23. Harmonic Spurious Outputs,
Options 1DN and 1DQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
24. Non-Harmonic Spurious Outputs, Options 1DN and 1DQ . . . . . 302
Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Measuring Fundamental Amplitudes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Measuring Non-Harmonic Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
10. Performance Verification Test Record

HP ESA-L1500A Performance Verification Test Record . . . . . . . . . . 308
10
1 Preparing for Use and Printing
11
Preparing for Use and Printing
Initial Inspection
Initial Inspection
Inspect the shipping container and verify that the contents are
complete. Keep the container and cushioning material until you have
inspected the spectrum analyzer.
Table 1-1 contains the accessories shipped with the analyzer. If the
contents are incomplete, or the spectrum analyzer does not pass the
performance tests, notify the nearest Hewlett-Packard office. If the
shipping container is damaged or the cushioning material shows signs
of stress, also notify the carrier. Keep the shipping materials for the
carrier’s inspection. The HP office will arrange for repair or
replacement without waiting for a claim settlement.
If the shipping materials are in good condition, retain them for possible
future use. You may wish to ship the spectrum analyzer to another
location or to return it to Hewlett-Packard for service. See “How to
Return Your Analyzer for Service” on page 52 for more information
about shipping materials.
If cleaning is necessary, use a damp cloth only.
WARNING To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the HP ESA-L1500A

mains before cleaning. Use a dry cloth or one slightly
dampened with water to clean the external case parts. Do not
attempt to clean internally.
Table 1-1 Accessories Supplied with the Spectrum Analyzer
HP Part
Description Comments
Number
Adapter, Type N (m) to 1250-0780 Not shipped with Option 1DP. Two adapters
BNC (f) are shipped with Option 1DN.
Power cable See Table 1-4 Shipped with analyzer.
12 Chapter 1
Power Requirements
Power Requirements
The spectrum analyzer is a portable instrument and requires no
physical installation other than connection to a power source. There is
no need to select a line voltage.
Table 1-2 AC Power Requirements
Voltage 90 to 250 Vrms
Frequency 47 to 440 Hz
Power Consumption, On less than 200 W
Power Consumption, less than 5 W

Standby
Table 1-3 DC Power Requirements
Voltage 12 to 22 Vdca
Power Consumption less than 175 W
a. 15 to 20 Vdc for serial prefix <US3745
Checking the Fuse

Where IEC regulations apply, use a 5 by 20 mm, rated F5A, 250 V IEC
approved fuse. This fuse may be used with input line voltages of 115 V
or 230 V. Its HP part number is 2110-0709.
Where UL/CSA regulations apply, use a 5 by 20 mm rated fast blow, 5
A, 125 V UL/CSA approved fuse. This fuse may only be used with an
input line voltage of 115 V. Its HP part number is 2110-0756.
The line fuse is housed in a small container in the upper left hand
corner of the rear panel.
To remove the fuse, first disconnect the power cord from the instrument.
Then insert the tip of a screwdriver into the slot at the middle of the
container, and turn counterclockwise to extend the container.
Chapter 1 13
Power Requirements
WARNING For continued protection against fire hazard, replace the line
fuse only with the same type and rating. The use of other fuses
or material is prohibited.
Power Cable
The spectrum analyzer is equipped with a three-wire power cable, in
accordance with international safety standards. When connected to an
appropriate power line outlet, this cable grounds the instrument
cabinet.
WARNING Failure to ground the spectrum analyzer properly can result in

personal injury. Before turning on the spectrum analyzer, you
must connect its protective earth terminals to the protective
conductor of the main power cable. Insert the main power cable
plug only into a socket outlet that has a protective earth
contact. DO NOT defeat the earth-grounding protection by
using an extension cable, power cable, or autotransformer
without a protective ground conductor.
If you are using an autotransformer, make sure its common
terminal is connected to the protective earth contact of the
power source outlet socket.
Various power cables are available to connect the spectrum analyzer to

the types of ac power outlets unique to specific geographic areas. The
cable appropriate for the area to which the spectrum analyzer is
originally shipped is included with the unit. You can order additional ac
power cables for use in different areas. The following table lists the
available ac power cables, illustrates the plug configurations, and
identifies the geographic area in which each cable is appropriate.
14 Chapter 1
Power Requirements
Table 1-4 Power Cables
HP
Cable Plug b Length Cable
Plug Type a For Use in Country
Part Description cm (in.) Color
Number
8120-1351 Straight 229 (90) Mint Option 900

BS 1363A Gray
United Kingdom, Hong
Kong, Cyprus, Nigeria,
Singapore, Zimbabwe
8120-1703 90˚ 229 (90) Mint
Gray
8120-1369 Straight 210 (79) Gray Option 901

AS 3112
Argentina, Australia, New
Zealand, Mainland China
8120-0696 90˚ 200 (78) Gray
8120-1378 Straight 203 (80) Jade Option 903

NEMA 5-15P Gray
United States, Canada,
Brazil, Colombia, Mexico,
Philippines, Saudi
Arabia, Taiwan
8120-1521 90˚ 203 (80) Jade
Gray

NEMA 5-15P
Japan
8120-4754 90˚ 229 (90) Gray

CEE 7/VII Gray
Continental Europe,
Central African Republic,
United Arab Republic
8120-1692 90˚ 200 (78) Mint
Gray

SEV Type 12
Switzerland
8120-2296 90˚ 200 (78) Gray
Chapter 1 15
Power Requirements
HP
Cable Plug b Length Cable
Plug Type a For Use in Country
Part Description cm (in.) Color
Number

SR 107-2-D
Denmark
8120-2957 90˚ 200 (78) Gray

IEC 83-B1 Gray
South Africa, India
8120-4600 90˚ 200 (78) Mint

Gray
8120-5182 Straight 200 (78) Jade Option 919

SI 32 Gray
Israel
8120-5181 90˚ 200 (78) Jade

Gray
a. E = earth ground, L = line, and N = neutral.

b. Plug identifier numbers describe the plug only. The HP part number is for the com-
plete cable assembly.
16 Chapter 1
Preparation
Preparation
WARNING If this product is to be energized via an external
autotransformer for voltage reduction, make sure that its
common terminal is connected to a neutral (earthed pole) of the
power supply.
CAUTION This instrument has autoranging line voltage input. Be sure the supply
voltage is within the specified range.
CAUTION Ventilation Requirements: When installing the product in a cabinet, the

convection into and out of the product must not be restricted. The
ambient temperature (outside the cabinet) must be less than the
maximum operating temperature of the product by 4 °C for every 100
watts dissipated in the cabinet. If the total power dissipated in the
cabinet is greater than 800 watts, then forced convection must be used.
NOTE Install the instrument so that the detachable power cord is readily
identifiable and is easily reached by the operator. The detachable power
cord is the instrument disconnecting device. It disconnects the mains
circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the instrument.
The front panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a LINE
switch. Alternatively, an externally installed switch or circuit breaker
(which is readily identifiable and is easily reached by the operator) may
be used as a disconnecting device.
Chapter 1 17
Turning on the Analyzer for the First Time

When you turn on the spectrum analyzer, you will see the message
“Doing Initial Alignment” on the display. This tells you that the
instrument is performing a portion of its automatic alignment.
To make sure your spectrum analyzer meets specifications, allow a 5
minute warm-up before making calibrated measurements.
NOTE It is normal to hear clicking when the Auto Alignment function is on.
During the interval between sweeps portions of the spectrum analyzer’s
circuitry are realigned. Some of the circuitry is controlled by relays. It is
the rapid switching of these relays between sweeps which causes the
clicking sound. Under normal operation, these relays will last over 50
years.
To eliminate the clicking sound, turn off the automatic alignment. (See
the Alignments key description in Chapter 4.) The Align Now All
function should, however, be performed periodically. For more
information on how often to perform Align Now All when the Auto
Alignment function is off, refer to Chapter 7, “Specifications.”
If you wish to use an external 10 MHz source as the reference

frequency, connect an external reference source to the 10 MHz REF IN
connector on the rear panel. The signal level should be greater than –15
dBm.
Perform the following steps:
1. Before using your spectrum analyzer, make sure it meets operating
temperature conditions.
2. Plug the power cord into the spectrum analyzer.
3. Press I (the On key).
After a few seconds, the screen will display the firmware revision
date in the YYYYMMDD format. For example, Rev 19970522
indicates revision May 22, 1997.
NOTE Record the firmware date and keep it for reference. If you should ever
need to call Hewlett- Packard for service or with any questions
regarding your spectrum analyzer, it will be helpful to have the
firmware date readily available.
If your spectrum analyzer is equipped with Option A4H (HP-IB and

Parallel interface), the interface address (HP-IB ADRS: XX) also
appears on the screen.
If your spectrum analyzer is equipped with Option 1AX (RS-232 and
Parallel interface), the baud rate (RS232: XXXX) is displayed.
18 Chapter 1
4. To meet spectrum analyzer specifications, allow a 5 minute warm-up

before attempting to make any calibrated measurements.
5. Refer to Chapter 7, “Specifications,” for information on when you
should perform automatic alignment functions.
Chapter 1 19
Printing with HP-IB
Printing with HP-IB

More than one instrument can communicate on the same HP-IB.
Therefore, each device must have a unique HP-IB address.
The printer must be configured with an address which can be
recognized by the spectrum analyzer. Be sure the spectrum analyzer’s
printer address is the same as that of the printer.
The spectrum analyzer will not print if it senses another controller on
the HP-IB. Therefore, other controllers, such as computers, must be
disabled. In most cases, it is sufficient to simply turn the other
controllers OFF.
Printing Using an HP-IB Interface

Equipment
• HP ESA-L1500A Spectrum Analyzer equipped with Option A4H.
• HP 10833A (or equivalent) HP-IB cable.
• Printer with HP-IB Interface. Choose one of the following:
• HP 2225A ThinkJet
• HP 3630A PaintJet
Interconnection and Printing Instructions

1. Turn off the printer and the spectrum analyzer.
2. Connect the printer to the spectrum analyzer using the HP-IB cable.
3. The printer usually resides at device address 1. See Figure 1-1 for a
typical HP-IB printer switch setup.
20 Chapter 1
Printing with HP-IB
Figure 1-1 ThinkJet Printer Switch Settings
4. Turn on the spectrum analyzer and printer.

5. The printer usually resides at device address 1. To configure the
spectrum analyzer to print to address 1, press the following keys:
System
Printer
Port
HP-IB
Printer Addr (appears in the menu only when HP-IB is selected)
Enter
6. Select the printer configuration for your spectrum analyzer by
pressing the appropriate keys. (See “Selecting a Printer” in this
chapter).
Chapter 1 21
Printing with RS-232
Printing Using an RS-232 Interface

This section describes how to print using an RS-232 interface. The
printer must be configured to be compatible with the spectrum
analyzer. Pay particular attention to the following:
Character Size 8-Bits
Parity OFF
Baud Rate 9600 (typical)
Handshaking DTR=YES, DUPLEX=FULL
Equipment
• HP ESA-L1500A Spectrum Analyzer equipped with Option 1AX.
• One of the following cables:
• HP 24542G 9-25 pin RS-232 cable
• HP C2932A 9-9 pin RS-232 cable (for use with LaserJet 4P and
4Plus)
• Printer with RS-232 interface. Choose one of the following:
• HP 500 Series DeskJet
• HP 2225D ThinkJet
• Epson MX-80
• Epson LQ-570
• HP LaserJet
• HP QuietJet or QuietJet Plus
Some models support color printing. Some models do not support the
RS-232 interface.

The RS-232 interface allows only one device to be connected to the
spectrum analyzer. Refer to the programmer’s guide for more
information on RS-232 protocol.
1. Turn off the spectrum analyzer and the printer.
22 Chapter 1
2. Connect the printer using an RS-232 cable.

The following Figure shows examples of some of the printer’s switch
configurations set up for 9600 baud. See your printer’s
documentation for more specific information.
Figure 1-2 9600 Baud Settings for Serial Printers
To set the spectrum analyzer baud rate to 9600, press:

System
Printer
Port
Serial
Baud Rate (appears in the menu only when Serial is selected)
9600
Enter

chapter).
Chapter 1 23
Printing With a Parallel Interface
Printing With a Parallel Interface

This section describes how to print using a parallel interface.
Equipment
• HP ESA-L1500A Spectrum Analyzer equipped with Option A4H or
1AX.
• HP C2950A parallel printer cable.
• Printer with parallel interface. Choose one of the following:
• HP 2225C ThinkJet
• HP 310 Portable DeskJet
• HP 500, 600, and 700 Series DeskJets
• HP LaserJet
• HP QuietJet or QuietJet Plus
• LQ-570 Epson
• MX-80 Epson

1. Turn off the printer and the spectrum analyzer.
2. Connect the printer to the spectrum analyzer using the parallel
printer cable.
3. If your printer has configuration switches, now is the time to set
them. Refer to your printer’s documentation for more specific
information on your printer’s configuration.
4. Turn on the spectrum analyzer and printer.
5. To print with a parallel interface press the following keys:
System
Printer
Port
Parallel

chapter).
24 Chapter 1
Selecting a Printer
Selecting a Printer
This section describes how to select a printer listed in the Select Printer
menus, as well as how to configure a printer unavailable as a menu
selection, by using the Define Printer menu keys.
How to Select a Printer

To access the printer selection menus, press the following keys:
System
Printer
Select Printer
More (if necessary)
If your printer is listed in the Select Printer menus, simply press the
appropriate key. If the printer you wish to use is not listed, refer to
“Defining a Printer” in this section.
Defining a Printer
If you have searched the Select Printer menu keys, and your printer is
not available as a selection, press the last menu key, which is labeled
User Defined. When you press the User Defined key, the Define Printer key
will appear in the menu.
The Define Printer key accesses the following menu of keys which may
allow you to use your printer:
Resolution
Resolution allows you to select the optimal resolution number to be

sent to the printer. Before a print, enter the resolution number using
the numeric keypad. (The knob and step keys cannot be used.)
Values to try include 75, 90, 100, 150, and 300.
Top Margin
Top Margin allows you to adjust the space above your print by
entering a number using the numeric keypad. (The knob and step
keys cannot be used.)
Bottom Margin
Bottom Margin allows you to adjust the space below your print by
entering a number using the numeric keypad. (The knob and step
keys cannot be used.)
Chapter 1 25
Selecting a Printer
HP Color Mode DJ PJ Off
HP Color Mode allows you to select between DeskJet, PaintJet, or

Off. For most color printing, use DeskJet.
NOTE For color printing, the Color Printing On Off key must be set to On. Refer
to the Printer key in Chapter 4, for all printer menu key descriptions.
Expand On Off
For printers that only support high resolutions, Expand On Off (with
On selected) allows you to expand your prints by a factor of three.
26 Chapter 1
2 Getting Started
27
Getting Started
What You’ll Find in this Chapter
What You’ll Find in this Chapter

This chapter introduces the basic functions of the spectrum analyzer. In
this chapter you will:
• Get acquainted with the front-panel and rear-panel features.
• Get acquainted with the function keys.
• Learn about screen annotation.
• Make a basic measurement (using the internal alignment signal).
• Learn about the spectrum analyzer battery for retaining internal
memory.
NOTE Before using your spectrum analyzer, please read Chapter 1,

“Preparing for Use and Printing,” which describes how to set up your
spectrum analyzer and how to verify that it is operational. Chapter 1
describes many safety considerations that should not be overlooked.
28 Chapter 2
Getting Started
Front Panel Features

Figure 2-1 Front Panel Feature Overview
1 Brightness keys allow you to change the brightness of

the display.
2 Menu keys are the unlabeled keys next to the screen.
The menu key labels are the annotation on the screen
next to the unlabeled keys. Most of the labeled keys on
the spectrum analyzer front panel (also called front
panel keys) access menus of related function keys.
3 Measure accesses a menu of keys that make some
common spectrum analyzer measurements.
4 Frequency, Span, and Amplitude are the three large keys
that activate the primary spectrum analyzer functions
and access menus of related functions.
Chapter 2 29
Getting Started
5 CONTROL functions access menus that allow you to

adjust the resolution bandwidth, adjust the sweep time,
and control the instrument display. They also set other
spectrum analyzer parameters needed for making
measurements.
6 SYSTEM functions affect the state of the entire
spectrum analyzer. Printer setup and alignment
routines are accessed with the System key. The green
Preset key resets the spectrum analyzer to a known
state.
The File key menu allows you to save and load traces,
states, limit-line tables and amplitude correction
factors to or from spectrum analyzer memory.
Print sends a copy of the screen data to a printer. Use
the Printer menu keys under System before using the
Print key. See Chapter 4 for more details.
7 MARKER functions control the markers, read out

frequencies and amplitudes along the spectrum
analyzer trace, automatically locate the signals of
highest amplitude, and keep a signal in the center of
the screen.
8 EARPHONE. The EARPHONE connector (located behind
the door on the right side of the front panel) provides a
connection for an earphone jack instead of using the
internal speaker.
9 VOLUME. The VOLUME knob can adjust the volume of
the internal speaker. The speaker is turned on and off
with the Speaker On Off key in the Det/Demod menu.
10 DATA keys, which include the step keys, knob, and
numeric keypad, allow you to change the numeric value
of an active function.
11 EXT KEYBOARD. The EXT KEYBOARD connector is a
6-pin mini-DIN connector that is compatible with most
PC keyboards. The external keyboard is not included
with the spectrum analyzer. The external keyboard can
be used to enter screen titles and remote commands.
CAUTION Turn off the spectrum analyzer before connecting an external keyboard
to the spectrum analyzer.
12 PROBE POWER provides power for high-impedance ac

probes or other accessories.
30 Chapter 2
Getting Started
13 Esc. The Esc (escape) key deactivates the active

function and blanks the active function text from the
display. Esc will abort a print (if one is in progress) and
clear error messages from the analyzer display. It also
clears input and tracking generator overload
conditions.
14 More. The More key accesses other pages of a multi-page
menu. A 1 of 2 type message is displayed just above the
key if there is more than one page.
15 INPUT 50Ω (INPUT 75Ω for Option 1DP) is the signal
input for the spectrum analyzer.
16 RF OUT 50Ω (for Option 1DN) or RF OUT 75Ω (for Option
1DQ) is the source output for the built-in tracking
generator. Option 1DN or 1DQ only.
CAUTION If the tracking generator output power is too high, it may damage the
device under test. Do not exceed the maximum power that the device
under test can tolerate.
17 The l (On) key turns the analyzer on, while the O

(Standby) key turns most of the analyzer off. An
instrument alignment is performed every time the
analyzer is turned on. After turning on the analyzer,
allow 5 minutes of warm-up time to ensure the
analyzer will meet all specifications.
NOTE The instrument continues to draw power when it is plugged into the ac
power source even if the line power switch is in standby. The detachable
power cord is the instrument disconnecting device. It disconnects the
mains circuits from the mains supply before other parts of the
instrument. The front-panel switch is only a standby switch and is not a
LINE switch (disconnecting device).
Data Controls
Data controls are used to change values for functions such as center
frequency, start frequency, resolution bandwidth, and marker position.
The data controls will change the active function in a manner
prescribed by that function. For example, you can change center
frequency in fine steps with the knob, in discrete steps with the step
keys, or to an exact value with the numeric keypad. Resolution
bandwidth, however, which can be set to discrete values in a 1, 3, 10
sequence only, is changed to the closest allowed value with any of the
data controls.
Chapter 2 31
Getting Started
Knob
The knob allows continuous change of functions such as center
frequency, reference level, and marker position. It also changes the
values of many functions that change in increments only. Clockwise
rotation of the knob increases values. For continuous changes, the
extent of alteration is determined by the size of the measurement
range; the speed at which the knob is turned affects the rate at which
the values are changed.
Among other things, the knob enables you to change the center
frequency, start or stop frequency, or reference level. In slow sweep
times, the analyzer uses a smooth scrolling feature which is designed to
move the trace display to the latest function value as the knob is
turned. When either center frequency or reference level is adjusted, the
signal will shift right or left or up or down with the rotation of the knob
before a new sweep is actually taken. An asterisk is placed in the
message block (the upper right-hand corner of the spectrum analyzer
display) to indicate that the data on-screen does not reflect data at the
current setting.
Numeric Keypad
The numeric keypad allows entry of exact values for many of the
spectrum analyzer functions. You may include a decimal point in the
number portion. If not, the decimal point is placed at the end of the
number.
Numeric entries must be terminated with a units key. When a numeric
entry is begun, the menu keys show the units key labels. The units keys
change depending on what the active function is. For example, the units
keys for frequency span are GHz, MHz, kHz, and Hz, whereas the units
for reference level are +dBm, −dBm, mV, and µV.
NOTE If an entry from the numeric keypad does not coincide with an allowed
function value (for example, that of a 12 MHz bandwidth), the spectrum
analyzer defaults to the nearest allowable value.
Step Keys
The step keys allow discrete increases or decreases of the active
function value. The step size depends upon the spectrum analyzer
measurement range or on a preset amount. Each press results in a
single step change. For those parameters with fixed values, the next
value in a sequence is selected each time a step key is pressed. Changes
are predictable and can be set for some functions. Out-of-range values
or out-of-sequence values will not occur using these keys.
32 Chapter 2
Getting Started
Rear Panel Features
Rear Panel Features

Figure 2-2 Rear Panel Feature Overview
1 Power input is the input for the line power source.

Make sure that the line-power source outlet has a
protective ground contact.
2 Line Fuse. The fuse is removed by twisting 1/4 turn.
Replace only with a fuse of the same rating. See the
label on the rear panel.
3 Standard Inputs/Outputs
3a VGA OUTPUT drives an external VGA

compatible monitor with a signal that
has 31.5 kHz horizontal, 60 Hz vertical
synchronizing rate, non-interlaced.
Chapter 2 33
Getting Started
Rear Panel Features
3b EXT TRIG IN (TTL) accepts the positive

edge of an external voltage input that
triggers the spectrum analyzer internal
sweep source.
3c HI SWP OUT (TTL) indicates when the
spectrum analyzer is sweeping.
4 (Shown) HP-IB and parallel (Option A4H) are
optional interfaces. HP-IB supports remote instrument
operation and direct printing of screen data. The
parallel port is for printing only.
(Not Shown) RS-232 and parallel (Option 1AX)
are optional interfaces. RS-232 supports remote
instrument operation and direct printing of screen
data. The parallel port is for printing only.
NOTE Only one optional interface can be installed at a time. Option 1AX or
Option A4H must be installed in slot 1 on the rear panel. Option A4H is
shown installed in slot 1 in Figure 6.
5 Spectrum Analyzer Inputs/Outputs (Option A4J):
SWP OUT provides a voltage ramp corresponding to the

sweep of the spectrum analyzer (0 V to 10 V).
HI SWP OUT (TTL) indicates when the spectrum analyzer
is sweeping.
HI SWP IN (TTL) can be grounded to stop sweeping.
AUX VIDEO OUT provides detected video output (before

the analog-to-digital conversion) proportional to
vertical deflection of the trace. Output is from 0 V to 1
V. Amplitude-correction factors are not applied to this
signal. The output signal will be blanked occasionally
during retrace by the automatic alignment routine.
Select a very long sweep time to minimize this, or turn
off the Auto Align All function (and use Align Now All
manually to maintain calibration.) Refer to the
Alignments key description in Chapter 4 for more
information on alignment key functions.
AUX IF OUT is a 50 Ω, 21.4 MHz IF output that is the
down- converted signal of the RF input of the spectrum
analyzer. Amplitude-correction factors are not applied
to this signal. This output is taken after the resolution
bandwidth filters and step gains and before the log
amplifier. The output signal will be blanked
occasionally during retrace by the automatic alignment
routine. Select a very long sweep time to minimize this,
or turn off the Auto Align All function (and use Align Now
34 Chapter 2
Getting Started
Rear Panel Features
All manually to maintain calibration.) Refer to the

Alignments key description in Chapter 4 for more
information on alignment key functions.
6 10 MHz REF IN accepts an external frequency source to
provide the 10 MHz, −15 to +10 dBm frequency
reference used by the spectrum analyzer.
10 MHz REF OUT provides a 10 MHz, 0 dBm minimum,
timebase reference signal.
7 Service Connector. The service connector is for service
use only.
8 Power On Selection selects a preference for when power
is applied to the analyzer’s rear panel power connector.
The analyzer can be set to always be off when power is
connected, or it can be set to go to the on/off condition
that existed when power was disconnected. This is
useful when the analyzer is used at an unattended
location to ensure that the analyzer powers on after a
power outage.
9 DC Fuse. Protects against too much power to the DC
power connector on the rear panel of the spectrum
analyzer.
10 DC Power is the input for the DC power source. Refer to
“Power Requirements” in the Specifications Chapter.
Chapter 2 35
Getting Started
Screen Annotation
Screen Annotation
Here is an example of the annotation that may appear on a spectrum
analyzer screen. The screen annotation is referenced by numbers which
are listed in the following table. The Function Key column indicates
which key activates the function related to the screen annotation. Refer
to Chapter 4 for more information on a specific function key.
Figure 2-3 Screen Annotation
36 Chapter 2
Getting Started
Screen Annotation
Table 2-1 Screen Annotation
Item Description Function Key
1 Detector mode Detector
2 Reference level Ref Level
3 Active function block Refer to the description of the

activated function.
4 Screen title Change Title
5 Time and date display Time/Date On Off
6 RF attenuation Attenuation Auto Man
7 External keyboard entry Refer to the external keyboard

information in the Measurement
Guide.
8 Preamplifier gain Ext Amp Gain
9 Marker counter Marker Count On Off
10 Measurement uncalibrated Auto Couple

or function-in-progress
messages
11 Remote/local operation See Local key in Chapter 4.
12 Error messages See Chapter 3, “Troubleshooting,”
13 Key menu title Dependent on key selection.
14 Key menu See key label descriptions in

Chapter 4.
15 Frequency span or stop Span, Stop Freq

frequency
16 Sweep time Sweep Time Auto Man
17 Frequency offset Freq Offset
18 Video bandwidth Video BW Auto Man
19 Center frequency or start Center Freq, Start Freq

frequency
20 Resolution bandwidth Resolution BW Auto Man
21 Auto alignment routine is Auto Align

on
22 Threshold Threshold On Off
23 Amplitude correction factors See “Using Amplitude Correction

on Factors” in the Measurement
Guide.
Chapter 2 37
Getting Started
Screen Annotation
Item Description Function Key
24 Trigger Trig
25 Trace mode Trace
26 Video average Video Average On Off
27 Display line Display Line On Off
28 Amplitude offset Ref Lvl Offst
29 Amplitude scale Scale Type Log Lin
Item 24 refers to the trigger and sweep modes of the spectrum analyzer.
The first letter (‘‘F”) indicates the spectrum analyzer is in free-run
trigger mode. The second letter (‘‘C”) indicates the spectrum analyzer is
in continuous-sweep mode.
Item 25 refers to the trace modes of the spectrum analyzer. The first
letter (‘‘W”) indicates that the spectrum analyzer is in clear-write mode.
The second letter is “A,” representing trace A. The trace B trace mode is
“SB”, indicating trace B (‘‘B”) is in the store-blank mode (‘‘S”). The trace
mode annotation for trace C is displayed under the trace mode
annotation of trace A. The trace C trace mode is “SC”, indicating trace C
(‘‘C”) is in the store blank mode (‘‘S”).
Refer to the following table for the screen annotation codes for trace,
trigger, and sweep modes.
Table 2-2 Screen Annotation for Trace, Trigger, and Sweep Modes
Trace Mode Trigger Mode Sweep Mode
W clear write (traces F free run C continuous

A/B/C)
M maximum hold (traces L line S single sweep

A/B)
V view (traces A/B/C) V video
S store blank (traces E external

A/B/C)
M minimum hold (trace C)
38 Chapter 2
Getting Started
Key Overview
Key Overview
The keys labeled Frequency, System, and Marker are all examples of
front panel keys. Pressing most front panel keys accesses menus of
functions that are displayed along the right side of the display. These
are called menu keys.
Menu keys list functions other than those accessed directly by the front
panel keys. To activate a menu key function, press the key immediately
to the right of the annotation on the screen. The menu keys that are
displayed depend on which front panel key is pressed and which menu
level is enabled.
If a menu key function’s value can be changed, it is called an active
function. The function label of the active function appears in inverse
video after that key has been selected. For example, press Amplitude.
This calls up the menu of related amplitude functions. Note the
function labeled Ref Level (the default selected key in the Amplitude
menu) appears in inverse video. Ref Level also appears in the active
function block, indicating that it is the active amplitude function and
can now be changed using any of the data entry controls.
A menu key with On and Off in its label can be used to turn the menu
key’s function on or off. To turn the function on, press the menu key so
that On is underlined. To turn the function off, press the menu key so
that Off is underlined. In the manual, when On should be underlined, it
will be indicated as: Video Average On Off (On).
A function with Auto and Man in the label can either be auto-coupled or
have its value manually changed. The function’s value can be changed
manually by pressing the menu key until Man is underlined, and then
changing its value with the numeric keypad, knob, or step keys. To
auto-couple a function, press the menu key so that Auto is underlined.
In the manual, when Auto should be underlined, it will be indicated as:
Attenuation Auto Man (Auto).
In some menus of keys, one key label will always be underlined to show
which key has been selected. For example, when you press the Mkr
Readout key (a Marker menu key) it will bring up its own menu of keys.
The Frequency key, which is the default selected key, will be underlined.
When you press another Mkr Readout menu key, the underline will
move to that key to show it has been selected.
A summary of all front panel keys and their related menu keys can be
found in Chapter 4, “Front-Panel Key Reference.”
Chapter 2 39
Getting Started
Making a Measurement
Let’s begin using the spectrum analyzer by measuring an input signal.
Since the internal 50 MHz alignment signal is readily available, we will
use it as our test signal.
You cannot hurt the spectrum analyzer by using the alignment signal
and pressing any of the keys described in this section. Don’t be afraid to
play with the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad. (If you have
experimented with other keys and wish to return to a known state,
press the green Preset key.)
1. First, turn the instrument on by pressing On. Wait for the power-up
process to complete.
2. Press the green Preset key.
3. Turn on the internal 50 MHz signal by pressing System, 50 MHz osc
On Off (On).
4. Set the frequency.

Press the Frequency key. Center appears on the left side of the
screen, indicating that the center-frequency function is active. The
Center Freq menu key label appears in inverse video to indicate that
center frequency is the active function. The active function block is
the space on the screen within the graticule where the active
function messages appear. Active function values can be changed
using the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad. Set the center
frequency to 50 MHz with the DATA keys by pressing 50 MHz. The
knob and step keys can also be used to set the center frequency.
5. Set the span.
Press Span. Span is now displayed in the active function block, and
the Span menu key label appears in inverse video to indicate it is the
active function. Reduce the span to 20 MHz by using the knob,
pressing the down key (↓), or pressing 20 MHz.
6. Set the amplitude.
When the peak of a signal does not appear on the screen, it may be
necessary to adjust the amplitude level on the screen. Press
Amplitude. Ref Level .0 dBm appears in the active function block.
The Ref Level menu key label appears in inverse video to indicate
that reference level is the active function. The reference level is the
top graticule line on the display and is set to 0.0 dBm. Changing the
value of the reference level changes the amplitude level of the top
graticule line.
40 Chapter 2
Getting Started
If desired, use the reference level function to place the signal peak at
the top of the screen using the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad.
(Marker functions measure the frequency and amplitude of a signal.)
Figure 2-4 demonstrates the relationship between center frequency
and reference level. The box in the figure represents the spectrum
analyzer display. Changing the center frequency changes the
horizontal placement of the signal on the display. Changing the
reference level changes the vertical placement of the signal on the
display. Increasing the span increases the frequency range that
appears horizontally on the display.
NOTE Spectrum analyzers with Option 1DP default to display amplitude

values in dBmV when in a log scale mode.
Figure 2-4 Relationship between Frequency and Amplitude
7. Set the marker.

You can place a diamond-shaped marker on the signal peak to find
the signal’s frequency and amplitude.
To activate a marker, press the Marker key (located in the MARKER
section of the front panel). The Marker Normal label appears in
inverse video to show that the marker is the active function. Turn
the knob to place the marker at the signal peak.
You can also use the Peak Search key, which automatically places a
marker at the highest point on the trace.
Readouts of marker amplitude and frequency appear in the active
function block and in the upper right corner of the display. Look at
the marker readout to determine the amplitude of the signal.
Chapter 2 41
Getting Started
If another function is activated, the frequency and amplitude can

still be identified by looking at the marker readout in the upper right
corner of the display.
Measurement Summary
1. Press the Preset key. Turn on the internal 50 MHz signal by pressing
System, 50 MHz osc On Off (On).
2. Set the center frequency by pressing the following keys: Frequency,

50 MHz.
3. Set the span by pressing the following keys: Span, 20 MHz.

4. The calibration signal is about −27 dBm (25 dBmV for Option 1DP),
below the top of the screen (almost three graticule divisions) using
these spectrum analyzer settings. If desired, adjust the reference
level: press Amplitude to activate the reference level, and use the
knob or step keys to change the reference level and bring the signal
to the top of the screen.
5. Determine the amplitude and frequency of the signal. You can either
press Peak Search or press Marker and move the marker to the signal
peak. Read the amplitude and frequency. The display should look
like the one in Figure 2-5. Frequency is displayed horizontally, and
amplitude (power) is displayed vertically.
42 Chapter 2
Getting Started
Figure 2-5 Reading the Amplitude and Frequency
Chapter 2 43
Getting Started
Analyzer Accuracy and the Internal Alignment Process
Analyzer Accuracy and the Internal

Alignment Process
Data from the internal alignment routine is necessary for spectrum
analyzer operation. The internal alignment routine runs continuously
to ensure that the spectrum analyzer is using current alignment data
that improves the spectrum analyzer frequency and amplitude
accuracy. Press the System, Alignments keys to view the alignment
menus. For more detailed information on the alignment keys, refer to
Chapter 4.
Warm-Up Time
In order for the spectrum analyzer to meet its specifications, allow it to
warm up for 5 minutes after being turned on before attempting to make
any calibrated measurements. If Auto Align Off is selected, refer to the
analyzer specifications for the conditions required to maintain
calibration.
44 Chapter 2
Getting Started
Analyzer Battery Information

The spectrum analyzers use a 3.6 V lithium battery to enable the
internal memory to retain data. The date when the battery was
installed is on a label on the rear panel of the spectrum analyzer. See
Figure 2-6.
The minimum life expectancy of the battery is 8 years at 25 °C, or 1
year at 55 °C. If you experience problems with the battery or the
recommended time period for battery replacement has elapsed, see
“How to Return Your Analyzer for Service” in Chapter 3.
If you wish to replace the battery yourself, you can purchase the service
documentation that provides all necessary test and maintenance
information. The battery is soldered onto the spectrum analyzer
processor board.
You can order the service documentation for an HP ESA-L1500A
spectrum analyzer through your HP Sales and Service office. The
documentation is described under “Service Documentation (Option
0BX)” in Chapter 6 of this manual.
After replacing the spectrum analyzer battery, write the date of battery
replacement on the rear-panel label.
Figure 2-6 Rear-Panel Battery Information Label
Chapter 2 45
Getting Started
46 Chapter 2
3 Troubleshooting
47
Troubleshooting
What You’ll Find in This Chapter
What You’ll Find in This Chapter

This chapter includes information on how to check for a problem with
your HP ESA-L1500A spectrum analyzer, and how to return it for
service. It also includes descriptions of all of the spectrum analyzer
built-in error messages.
Your spectrum analyzer is built to provide dependable service.
However, if you experience a problem, or if you desire additional
information or wish to order parts, options, or accessories,
Hewlett-Packard’s worldwide sales and service organization is ready to
provide the support you need.
In general, a problem can be caused by a hardware failure, a software
error, or a user error. Follow these general steps to determine the cause
and to resolve the problem:
1. Perform the quick checks listed in “Check the Basics” in this chapter.
It is possible that a quick check may eliminate your problem
altogether.
2. If the problem is a hardware problem, you have several options:
• Repair it yourself; see the “Service Options” section in this
chapter.
• Return the spectrum analyzer to Hewlett-Packard for repair; if
the spectrum analyzer is still under warranty or is covered by an
HP maintenance contract, it will be repaired under the terms of
the warranty or plan (the warranty is at the front of this manual).
If the spectrum analyzer is no longer under warranty or is not
covered by an HP maintenance plan, Hewlett-Packard will notify
you of the cost of the repair after examining the unit. See “How to
Call Hewlett-Packard” and “How to Return Your Analyzer for
Service” for more information.
WARNING No operator serviceable parts inside. Refer servicing to

qualified personnel. To prevent electrical shock do not remove
covers.
48 Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Before You Call Hewlett-Packard
Check the Basics

A problem can often be solved by repeating the procedure you were
following when the problem occurred. Before calling Hewlett-Packard
or returning the spectrum analyzer for service, please make the
following checks:
1. Check the line fuse.
2. Is there power at the receptacle?
3. Is the analyzer turned on? Make sure the fan is running, which
indicates that the power supply is on.
4. If the display is dark or dim, press the upper brightness key in the
upper left corner of the front panel. This key will not automatically
repeat if held down. It must be pressed repeatedly to continue to
change the brightness.
5. If the display contrast is poor, press Display and Contrast (Contrast is
the fifth key from the top). Then change the contrast using the knob,
step keys, or numeric keypad.
6. If other equipment, cables, and connectors are being used with the
HP ESA-L1500A spectrum analyzer, make sure they are connected
properly and operating correctly.
7. Review the procedure for the measurement being performed when
the problem appeared. Are all the settings correct?
8. If the analyzer is not functioning as expected, return the analyzer to
a known state by pressing the Preset key.
Some analyzer settings are not affected by a Preset. If you wish to
reset the spectrum analyzer configuration to the state it was in
when it was originally sent from the factory, press System, More,
Default Config.
9. Is the measurement being performed, and the results that are

expected, within the specifications and capabilities of the spectrum
analyzer? See the “Specifications” chapter in this manual for
spectrum analyzer specifications.
10.In order to meet specifications, the spectrum analyzer must be
aligned. Either Auto Align All must be selected (press System, Auto
Align, All), or the analyzer must be manually aligned at least once
per hour, or whenever the temperature changes more than 5˚
centigrade (press System, Alignments, Align Now, All). When Auto
Align All is selected AA appears on the left edge of the display.
Chapter 3 49
Troubleshooting
11.Is the spectrum analyzer displaying an error message? If so, refer to

“Error Messages” in this chapter.
12.If the necessary test equipment is available, perform the
performance verification tests in Chapter 9. Record all results on a
Performance Verification Test Record form which follows the tests.
Read the Warranty

The warranty for your spectrum analyzer is at the front of this manual.
Please read it and become familiar with its terms.
If your spectrum analyzer is covered by a separate maintenance
agreement, please be familiar with its terms.
Service Options
Hewlett-Packard offers several optional maintenance plans to service
your spectrum analyzer after the warranty has expired. Call your
Hewlett-Packard sales and service office for full details.
If you want to service the spectrum analyzer yourself after the
warranty expires, you can purchase the service documentation that
provides all necessary test and maintenance information.
You can order the service documentation, Option 0BX, through your
Hewlett- Packard sales and service office. Service documentation is
described under “Service Documentation (Option 0BX)” in Chapter 6.
How to Call Hewlett-Packard

Hewlett-Packard has sales and service offices around the world to
provide you with complete support for your spectrum analyzer. To
obtain servicing information or to order replacement parts, contact the
nearest Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Office listed in Table 6. In
any correspondence or telephone conversations, refer to the instrument
by its model number and full serial number. (Press the System, then
Show System front-panel keys and the model, product, and serial
number information will be displayed on your analyzer screen.)
50 Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Table 3-1 Hewlett-Packard Sales and Service Offices
UNITED STATES
Instrument Support Center
Hewlett-Packard Company
(800) 403-0801
EUROPEAN FIELD OPERATIONS

Headquarters France Germany
Hewlett-Packard S.A. Hewlett-Packard France Hewlett-Packard GmbH
150, Route du Nant-d’Avril 1 Avenue Du Canada Hewlett-Packard Strasse
1217 Meyrin 2/ Geneva Zone D’Activite De Courtaboeuf 61352 Bad Homburg v.d.H
Switzerland F-91947 Les Ulis Cedex Germany
(41 22) 780.8111 France (49 6172) 16-0
(33 1) 69 82 60 60
Great Britain
Hewlett-Packard Ltd.
Eskdale Road, Winnersh Triangle
Wokingham, Berkshire RG41 5DZ
England
(44 734) 696622
INTERCON FIELD OPERATIONS

Headquarters Australia Canada
Hewlett-Packard Company Hewlett-Packard Australia Ltd. Hewlett-Packard (Canada) Ltd.
3495 Deer Creek Rd. 31-41 Joseph Street 17500 South Service Road
Palo Alto, CA 94304-1316 Blackburn, Victoria 3130 Trans-Canada Highway
USA (61 3) 895-2895 Kirkland, Quebec H9J 2X8
(415) 857-5027 Canada
(514) 697-4232
Japan Singapore Taiwan

Hewlett-Packard Japan, Ltd. Hewlett-Packard Singapore (Pte.) Ltd. Hewlett-Packard Taiwan
9-1 Takakura-Cho, Hachioji 150 Beach Road 8th Floor, H-P Building
Tokyo 192, Japan #29-00 Gateway West 337 Fu Hsing North Road
(81 426) 60-2111 Singapore 0718 Taipei, Taiwan
(65) 291-9088 (886 2) 712-0404
China
China Hewlett-Packard Co.
38 Bei San Huan X1 Road
Shuang Yu Shu
Hai Dian District
Beijing, China
(86 1) 256-6888
Chapter 3 51
Troubleshooting
How to Return Your Analyzer for Service
Service Tag
If you are returning the spectrum analyzer to Hewlett-Packard for
servicing, fill in and attach a blue service tag. Several service tags are
supplied at the rear of this chapter. Please be as specific as possible
about the nature of the problem. If you have recorded any error
messages that appeared on the screen, or have completed a
Performance Test Record, or have any other specific data on the
performance of the spectrum analyzer, please send a copy of this
information with the unit.
Original Packaging
Before shipping, pack the unit in the original factory packaging
materials if they are available. If the original materials were not
retained, see “Other Packaging.”
NOTE Ensure that the instrument handle is in the rear-facing position in

order to reduce the possibility of damage during shipping. Refer to
Figure 3-1.
52 Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Figure 3-1
Chapter 3 53
Troubleshooting
Other Packaging
CAUTION Spectrum analyzer damage can result from using packaging materials
other than those specified. Never use styrene pellets in any shape as
packaging materials. They do not adequately cushion the equipment or
prevent it from shifting in the carton. They cause equipment damage by
generating static electricity and by lodging in the spectrum analyzer
louvers, blocking airflow.
You can repackage the instrument with commercially available

materials, as follows:
1. Attach a completed service tag to the instrument.
2. If you have a front-panel cover, install it on the instrument; if not,
protect the control panel with cardboard.
3. Wrap the instrument in antistatic plastic to reduce the possibility of
damage caused by electrostatic discharge.
4. Use a strong shipping container. A double-walled, corrugated
cardboard carton with 159 kg (350 lb) bursting strength is adequate.
The carton must be both large enough and strong enough to
accommodate the spectrum analyzer. Allow at least 3 to 4 inches on
all sides of the analyzer for packing material.
5. Surround the equipment with three to four inches of packing
material and prevent the equipment from moving in the carton. If
packing foam is not available, the best alternative is S.D.-240 Air
Cap™ from Sealed Air Corporation (Hayward, California, 94545).
Air Cap looks like a plastic sheet filled with 1-1/4 inch air bubbles.
Use the pink-colored Air Cap to reduce static electricity. Wrapping
the equipment several times in this material should both protect the
equipment and prevent it from moving in the carton.
6. Seal the shipping container securely with strong nylon adhesive
tape.
7. Mark the shipping container “FRAGILE, HANDLE WITH CARE” to
assure careful handling.
8. Retain copies of all shipping papers.
54 Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
Error Messages
The spectrum analyzer can generate various messages that appear on
its screen during operation to indicate a problem.
There are three types of messages: hardware error messages (H),
user-created error messages (U), and informational messages (M).
• Hardware error messages indicate the spectrum analyzer hardware
is probably broken. Additional troubleshooting should be done to
verify the failure.
• User-created error messages appear when the spectrum analyzer is
used incorrectly. They are often generated during remote operation
(entering programming commands using either a controller or the
external keyboard).
• Informational messages provide information indicating the
spectrum analyzer’s progress within a specific procedure.
The messages are listed in alphabetical order on the following pages;
each message is defined, and its type is indicated by an (H), (U), or (M).
ADC-2V fail Indicates a hardware failure. (H)
ADC-Gnd fail Indicates a hardware failure. (H)
ADC-time fail Indicates a hardware failure. (H)
Align IF: gain limited, may recover next alignment
Indicates that an Align Now for the IF Assembly reached a hardware
limit. Perform another Align Now IF. If the message persists there
may be a hardware failure. Load the default values by pressing
System, Alignments, Load Defaults and see if the alignment process
fixes the problem. (M) or (H)
Align IF: symmetry limited, may recover next
alignment Indicates that an Align Now for the IF Assembly
reached a hardware limit. Perform another Align Now IF. If the
message persists there may be a hardware failure. Load the default
values by pressing System, Alignments, Load Defaults and see if the
alignment process fixes the problem. (M) or (H)
Align Now All needed The instrument requires an Align Now,
All.(M)
Align RF skipped 50 MHz detected Indicates that an Auto
Align of the RF Assembly was not performed because of an input
signal at 50 MHz that is >−25 dBm. The alignment will not work
when there is too much input power at 50 MHz. The analyzer will
continue to measure properly, but automatic RF alignment will not
function. To remove the message, remove the 50 MHz input signal
and perform an Align Now RF. (U) or (M)
Chapter 3 55
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
Align RF skipped No align signal Indicates that an Auto

Align of the RF Assembly was not performed because the
instrument’s internal alignment signal was not detected or was
invalid. This could be due to a problem with the accuracy or stability
of the external 10 MHz reference, if one is present. (U) or (H)
Alignment Needed Occurs after a ‘Load Defaults’ of alignment
data. A complete alignment must be performed. Press Align Now, All.
(U) or (M)
Atten auto set to 15 dB Indicates that an input signal has
been detected which is of sufficient level to force the input
attenuator to be auto-coupled at 15 dB. No operator intervention is
required. If the signal level is reduced the attenuator will stay at 15
dB.
This overload protection occurs at an input power level of 13 dBm ±7
dBm (nominal), or 68 dBmV ±7 dBmV for Option 1DP, when the
input attenuation is auto-coupled and set to <15 dB. To return to the
original measurement setup, reduce the input signal level and press
Amplitude. Then press Attenuation Auto Man twice, to toggle back to
Auto. (U) or (M)
When operating remotely, the status bit should be monitored for this
condition to avoid incorrect measurement results.
Cannot reach N dB points Indicates that the number of dB
specified for the N dB PTS function is greater than the distance of
the signal peak from the spectrum analyzer noise floor or peak
threshold. (U)
CMD ERR:_ _ _ The specified programming command is not
recognized by the spectrum analyzer. (U)
Configuration error: Front Panel/Display ID not
recognized At power on an error was encountered identifying the
Front Panel/Display assembly. (H)
Configuration error: Option ID not recognized The
hardware for an option was identified in an instrument that does not
support it. (H)
Configuration error: RF Assembly ID not recognized At
power on an error was encountered when identifying the RF
Assembly. (H)
Configuration error: RF-Source Impedance mismatch A
power up check determined that the RF Assembly and optional
Tracking Generator Assembly do not have the same impedance. (H)
Data Memory Full<data type>:_ _ _ An attempt was made to
save a file of <data type> to memory, however the memory space is
full. (U)
56 Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
EXT REF Indicates that the frequency reference is being supplied by

an external 10 MHz source. (M)
EXT Reference in use An attempt to perform a Timebase
alignment with an External Reference in use. (U)
FILE NOT FOUND Indicates that the specified file could not be
loaded into spectrum analyzer memory or purged from memory
because the file name cannot be found. (U)
Freq corr off Indicates that the Freq Correct selection if Off. (M)
Input is internal Indicates that the 50 MHz osc selection is On.
With the 50 MHz oscillator On, the input is routed through an
internal signal path. (M)
INVALID AMPCOR: FREQ For the AMPCOR command, the
frequency data must be entered in increasing order. See the
description for the AMPCOR programming command for more
information. (U)
INVALID CHECKSUM: USTATE The user-defined state does not
follow the expected format. (U)
INVALID ENTER FORMAT The enter format is not valid. See the
appropriate programming command description to determine the
correct format. (U)
INVALID FILE NAME <file name> Indicates the specified file
name is invalid. A file name is invalid if there is no file name
specified or the file name is too long. See the description for the
SAVE programming command for more information. (U)
Invalid flatness data:_ _ _ A power up check determined an
error in the instrument’s flatness data. The 4-digit code may indicate
the type of error. Error codes are described in the spectrum
analyzer’s service guide. (H)
INVALID HP-IB ADRS/OPERATION An HP-IB operation was
aborted due to an incorrect address or invalid operation. Check that
there is only one controller (the spectrum analyzer) connected to the
printer. (U)
INVALID HP-IB OPERATION REN TRUE The HP-IB operation is not
allowed. (This is usually caused by trying to print when a controller
is on the interface bus with the spectrum analyzer.) To print to an
HP-IB printer from the spectrum analyzer, you must disconnect any
other controllers on the HP-IB. If you are using programming
commands to print, you can use an HP BASIC command instead of
disconnecting the controller. See the description for the PRINT
command for more information. (U)
INVALID ITEM: Indicates an invalid parameter has been used in a
programming command. (U)
Chapter 3 57
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
INVALID OUTPUT FORMAT The output format is not valid. See the
appropriate programming command description to determine the
correct format. (U)
INVALID RANGE: Stop < Start Indicates that the first trace
element specified for a range of trace elements is larger than the
ending trace element. When specifying a trace range the starting
element must be less than the ending element. For example,
TRA[2,300] is legal but TRA[300,2] is not. (U)
INVALID RS-232/OPERATION An RS-232 operation was aborted
due to an invalid operation. (U)
INVALID START INDEX Indicates that the first trace element
specified for a range of trace elements is not within the trace range
of the specified trace. (U)
INVALID STOP INDEX Indicates that the ending trace element
specified for a range of trace elements is not within the trace range
of the specified trace. (U)
INVALID STORE DEST: _ _ _ The specified destination field is
invalid. (U)
INVALID TRACE: _ _ _ The specified trace is invalid. (U)
INVALID VALUE PARAMETER: _ _ _ The specified value
parameter is invalid. (U)
Marker Count Reduce SPAN Indicates the resolution bandwidth
to span ratio is too small to use the frequency count function. Check
the span and resolution bandwidth settings. The acceptable
Span/Res BW ratio is ≤500. (U)
Marker Count Widen Res BW Indicates that the current
resolution bandwidth setting is too narrow to use with the marker
counter function. (U)
Meas uncal The measurement is uncalibrated. Check the sweep
time, span, and bandwidth settings, or press AUTO COUPLE. (U)
No points defined Indicates the specified limit line or amplitude
correction function cannot be performed because no limit line
segments or amplitude correction factors have been defined. (U)
Overload: Reduce Signal A signal has been applied to the input
connector that caused the overload protection circuitry to engage.
The input signal must be reduced. After the signal is reduced, press
Esc. The change in the instrument’s amplitude state will disengage
the overload protection function. Overload protection engages under
the following conditions: (U) or (M)
58 Chapter 3
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
Attenuator Attenuator Input Power Level Input Power Level

Setting Coupling (50Ω) (75Ω)
≥15 dB Auto or Man 33 dBm ±3 dB (nominal) 76 dBmV ±3 dBmV
<15 dB Man 13 dBm ±7 dB (nominal) 68 dBmV ±7 dBmV
CAUTION Exposing the analyzer to high levels of input power over a prolonged
time period can damage the circuitry.
When operating remotely, the status bit should be monitored for this
condition to avoid incorrect measurement results.
PARAMETER ERROR: _ _ _ The specified parameter is not
recognized by the spectrum analyzer. See the appropriate
programming command description to determine the correct
parameters. (U)
Password required Indicates that the service function cannot be
accessed without the password. (U)
Power-up selftest failed Boot ROM checksum: Indicates a
test of the bootrom produced a checksum error. (H)
Power-up selftest failed RAM error: Indicates a test of
RAM produced an error. (H)
Power-up selftest failed Checksum: Indicates a test of the
instrument ROM produced a checksum error. (H)
Require 1 signal > PEAK EXCURSION above PEAK
THRESHOLD Indicates that the N dB PTS routine cannot locate a
signal that is high enough to measure. The signal must be greater
than the peak excursion above the threshold level to measure. (U)
Require 3 signals > PEAK EXCURSION above PEAK
THRESHOLD Indicates that the % AM routine cannot locate three
signals that are high enough to measure. The signals must be
greater than the peak excursion above the threshold level to
measure. (U)
Require 4 signals > PEAK EXCURSION above PEAK
THRESHOLD Indicates that the TOI routine cannot locate four signals
that are high enough to measure. The signals must be greater than
the peak excursion above the threshold level to measure. (U)
Required Option Not Installed Indicates that the function
selected requires optional hardware that is not currently available.
(U)
RF LO Unlocked Indicates that the local oscillator within the
instrument’s RF assembly is unlocked. (H)
Chapter 3 59
Troubleshooting
Error Messages
S in the status area of the display indicates that the service request
is active. Service requests are a form of informational message. More
information is available in the Programmer’s Guide. (M)
SAVE LOCK The spectrum analyzer’s internal memory has been
locked. To unlock the memory, press Internal Lock On Off so that Off is
underlined. For remote operation, use PSTATE OFF. (U)
Signals do not fit expected % AM pattern Indicates that
the % AM routine cannot perform the percent AM measurement
because the on-screen signals do not have the characteristics of a
carrier with two sidebands. (U)
Signals do not fit expected TOI pattern Indicates that the
TOI routine cannot perform the third-order intermodulation
measurement because the on-screen signals do not have the
characteristics of two signals and two distortion products. (U)
Source Protected A signal has been applied to the RF OUT
connector which caused the source output protection circuitry to
engage. The signal must be reduced. After the signal is reduced,
press the ESC key to disengage the source output protection
circuitry. (U) or (M)
TABLE FULL Indicates the upper or lower table of limit lines
contains the maximum number of entries allowed. Additional
entries to the table are ignored. (U)
TG LO Unlocked Indicates that the local oscillator within the
instrument’s tracking generator assembly is unlocked. (H)
TG unleveled This message can indicate the following: that the
source power is set higher or lower than the spectrum analyzer can
provide, that the frequency span extends beyond the specified
frequency range of the tracking generator, or that the calibration
data for the tracking generator is incorrect. See “Stimulus-Response
Measurements” in the User’s Guide for more information. (U)
Too many signal with valid N dB points Indicates the N dB
PTS function has located two or more signals that have amplitudes
within the specified dB from the signal peak. If this happens, you
should decrease the span of the spectrum analyzer so that only the
signal that you want to measure is displayed. (U)
Trace A is not available Indicates that trace A is in the
store-blank mode and cannot be used for limit-line testing. Use
CLEAR WRITE A or VIEW A to change trace A from the store-blank
mode to the clear write mode, and then turn on limit-line testing. (U)
60 Chapter 3
4 Front-Panel Key Reference
The key descriptions are organized like the spectrum analyzer menus.
Use the following table to locate a specific key.
61
Front-Panel Key Reference
Page
Key Label
Location
Page
Key Label
Location Baud Rate page 108
% AM On Off page 91 Blank A, B, C page 112
50 MHz osc On Off page 106 Bottom Margin page 108
A↔B page 113 Brightness page 71
A↔C page 113 BW/Avg page 72
ADC page 106 Center Freq page 83
Align Now page 106 CF Step Auto Man page 83
Alignments page 106 Change Title page 76
All page 106 Clear Title page 77
All but RF page 106 Clear Write A page 110
All Ampcor page 81 Clear Write B page 111
All Limits page 81 Clear Write C page 112
All Memory page 81 Coarse page 107
All States page 81 Color Printing On Off page 109
All Traces page 81 Contrast page 77
AM page 74 Datemode MDY DMY page 105
Ampcor page 67 Define Printer page 108
Ampcor On Off page 67 Default Config page 107
Amplitude page 66 Del Segment page 88
Amplitude On Off page 100 Delete page 81
Amptd Offset page 101 Delete Limits page 90
Amptd Step Auto Man page 100 Delete Now page 81
Amptd Units page 67 Delete Point page 67
Annotation On Off page 77 Demod page 74
Attenuation Auto Man page 66 Det/Demod page 74
Auto Align page 106 Detector page 74
Auto Couple page 70 Display page 76
B→C page 113 Display Line On Off page 76
B↔C page 113 Dwell Time On Off page 75
B − DL → B page 113 Edit Limits page 88
62 Chapter 4
Page Page
Key Label Key Label
Location Location
Edit Line page 88 Limits page 87

Enter page 78 Limits Fixed Rel page 88
Erase Internal page 81 Line page 115
Esc page 79 LO page 106
Execute Title page 77 Load page 80
Expand On Off page 108 Load Defaults page 107
Ext Amp Gain page 68 Load Now page 80
External page 115 (Local) page 105
File page 80 Marker page 85
Fine page 107 Marker # On Off page 86
Flat page 88 Marker ∆ page 85
Form Feed page 109 Marker All Off page 86
Free Run page 115 Marker Count On Off page 82
Freq Correct On Off page 106 Marker Noise On Off page 86
Freq Count page 82 Marker Normal page 85
Freq Offset page 83 Marker Trace Auto A B page 86
C
Frequency page 83
Max Hold A, B page 112
Full Span page 102
Max Mixer Lvl page 68
Graticule On Off page 77
Max Pk → CF page 97
HP Color Mode PJ DJ page 108
Off Measure page 87
HP-IB page 108 Min Hold C page 112
IF page 106 Min Search page 98
Input Z Corr 50 75 page 68 Mkr ∆ → Span page 98
Internal Lock On Off page 81 Mkr → CF page 97
Inverse Time page 86 Mkr → CF Step page 98
Inverse Video On Off page 77 Mkr → Ref Lvl page 97
Last Span page 102 Mkr → Start page 98
Limit Display Y N Auto page 87 Mkr → Stop page 98
Limit Test On Off page 87 Mkr Readout page 86
Chapter 4 63
Page Page
Key Label Key Label
Location Location
Modify Ampcor page 67 Purge Ampcor page 67

More page 92 Ref Lvl Offst page 67
N dB Points On Off page 91 Ref Level page 66
Negative Peak page 74 Remote Port HP-IB page 105
New Filename page 80 Remote Port Serial page 106
Next Peak page 97 Resolution page 108
Next Pk Left page 97 Resolution Auto Man page 82
Next Pk Right page 97 Resolution BW Auto Man page 72
Norm Ref Lvl page 114 RF page 106
Norm Ref Posn page 114 Sample page 74
Normalize page 113 Save page 80
Normalize On Off page 113 Save Now page 81
Operations page 113 Scale/Div page 66
Parallel page 108 Scale Type Log Lin page 66
Peak page 74 Search page 97
Peak Excursn page 97 Segment page 88
Peak Search page 93 Select Amptd page 67
Period page 86 Select Freq page 67
Pk-Pk Search page 98 Select Line Upper Lower page 88
Pk Threshold page 98 Select Marker 1 2 3 4 page 85
Point page 88 Select Point page 67
Port page 108 Select Printer page 108
Power On IP Last page 106 Serial page 108
Power Sweep On Off page 100 Service page 108
Preferences page 77 Set Date page 105
Preset page 94 Set Time page 105
Print page 96 Show System page 107
Print Softkeys On Off page 109 Signal Track On Off page 84
Printer page 105 Single Sweep page 99
Printer Addr page 108 Slope page 88
64 Chapter 4
Page Page
Key Label Key Label
Location Location
Source Amptd page 100 View A, B, C page 112

Span page 102 X Axis Units Freq Time page 87
Span Zoom page 102 Zero Span page 102
Speaker On Off page 74
Standby page 103
Start Freq page 83
State page 80
Stop Freq page 83
Sweep page 104
Sweep Cont Single page 104
Sweep Time Auto Man page 104
Swp Coupling SR SA page 104
System page 105
Threshold On Off page 76
Time page 86
Time/Date page 105
Time/Date On Off page 105
Timebase page 107
Title page 76
Top Margin page 108
Trace page 110
Trace A B C page 110
Trig page 115
Type page 88
User Defined page 108
VBW/RBW Ratio page 72
Video page 115
Video Average On Off page 72
Video BW Auto Man page 72
Chapter 4 65
Amplitude
Amplitude
Amplitude activates the reference level function and accesses the
amplitude menu keys. Amplitude menu key functions include the
following: reference level, input attenuation, vertical scale, mixer level,
amplitude units, amplitude correction, and amplitude offset.
Ref Level allows the reference level to be changed. This function is activated
when Amplitude is pressed. The reference level is the amplitude power
or voltage represented by the top graticule line on the display.
Changing the value of the reference level changes the absolute
amplitude level (in the current amplitude units) of the top graticule
line. Pressing any digit, 0 through 9, on the numeric keypad brings up
the selected terminator menu. Key Access: Amplitude
Attenuation Auto sets the input attenuation in 5 dB increments. The spectrum analyzer
Man input attenuator, which is normally coupled to the reference level
control, reduces the power level of the spectrum analyzer input signal
at the input mixer. The attenuator is recoupled when Auto is
underlined.
CAUTION To prevent damage to the input mixer, the power level at the input
mixer must not exceed +30 dBm. To prevent signal compression, power
at the input to the first mixer must be kept below 0 dBm. With the
attenuator set to Auto, a signal at or below the reference level will
result in a mixer level at or below –10 dBm.
Key Access: Amplitude
Scale/Div sets the logarithmic units per vertical graticule division on the display.
Scale/Div only appears in the Amplitude menu when the Scale Type Log
Lin key is set to Log. Using Scale/Div, values may range from 0.1 to
20 dB per division. Key Access: Amplitude
Scale Type Log Lin scales the vertical graticule divisions in logarithmic units when Log is
underlined, and the logarithmic units per division can be changed.
Values may range from 0.1 to 20 dB per division. The default amplitude
units are dBm when Lin is underlined. The vertical divisions are
linearly scaled and the default amplitude units are volts. The
reference-level value is set to the top of the display and the bottom
graticule becomes zero volts. (Each division of the graticule is one-tenth
of the reference level in volts.) Pressing Scale Type Log Lin always sets
the units specified for the current amplitude scale. Pressing Preset or
powering on the spectrum analyzer sets the default units.
Key Access: Amplitude
66 Chapter 4
Amplitude
Amptd Units accesses the softkeys that change the amplitude units. The amplitude
units can be changed by pressing dBm, dBmV, dBuV, Volts, or Watts.
When amplitude units is set to Watts, amplitude readings below 1 pW
will be rounded to 0 pW. Key Access: Amplitude
Ref Lvl Offst adds an offset value to the displayed reference level. Offsets are entered
by using the numeric keypad. Entering an offset does not affect the
trace or the attenuation value. Reference-level offsets are used when
gain or loss occurs between a device under test and the spectrum
analyzer input. Thus, the signal level measured by the spectrum
analyzer is the level at the input of an external amplitude-conversion
device. When an amplitude offset is entered, its value appears on the
left side of the display (as opposed to frequency offsets which appear at
the bottom of the display). To eliminate an offset, press Ref Lvl Offst, 0,
dB. Pressing Preset also sets the offset to zero. Reference-level offsets
are entered using the numeric keypad. See also the Ext Amp Gain
softkey description. Key Access: Amplitude
Ampcor accesses the following Ampcor menu keys, which allow you to create or
modify an amplitude-correction factors table. Key Access: Amplitude,
More
Ampcor On Off turns the current amplitude-correction factors on or off.

Key Access: Amplitude, Ampcor
Modify Ampcor accesses the following Modify Ampcor menu keys.
Key Access: Amplitude, Ampcor
Select Point
allows you to create or edit an amplitude-correction

factor data point. Enter the point number to be created
or edited by using the numeric keypad, then press
Enter. Press Back Space to correct errors.
Key Access: Amplitude, Ampcor, Modify Ampcor
Select Freq
allows you to enter the frequency value for an

amplitude- correction point. Enter the frequency value
by using the numeric keypad. Change the frequency
value by using the step keys or the knob. Press Back
Space to correct errors.
A frequency coordinate must always be specified for

amplitude-correction factors.
NOTE For amplitude-correction factors, a maximum of two entries with the

same frequency are valid. Only the first and last points of a series with
the same frequency values are used; any middle points are ignored.
Chapter 4 67
Amplitude
NOTE Amplitude-correction data is sorted in the table by frequency. The

sorting occurs immediately after you have entered the frequency value
via the front-panel.

Select Amptd
allows you to enter the amplitude value for the current

amplitude-correction point. Change an amplitude value
by using the step keys or the knob. Press Back Space to
correct errors. Key Access: Amplitude, Ampcor, Modify
Ampcor
Delete Point
deletes an amplitude-correction factor.

Purge Ampcor
allows you to clear all data from the

amplitude-correction tables. Key Access: Amplitude,
Ampcor, Modify Ampcor
Ext Amp Gain adds a positive or negative preamplifier gain value, which is subtracted
from the displayed signal. The function is similar to the Ref Lvl Offset
function, however with the Ext Amp Gain function, the attenuation may
be changed depending on the preamplifier gain entered. A preamplifier
gain offset is used for measurements that require an external
preamplifier or long cables. The offset is subtracted from the amplitude
readout so that the displayed signal level represents the signal level at
the input of the preamplifier. The preamplifier gain offset is displayed
at the top of the screen and is removed by entering zero. The
preamplifier gain offset is entered using the numeric keypad. The
preamplifier gain value is not affected by an instrument preset.
Key Access: Amplitude, More
Max Mixer Lvl lets you change the maximum input mixer level from −10 dBm to
−100 dBm in 10 dB steps using the step keys, and 1 dB steps using the
knob. The mixer level is equal to the reference level minus the
attenuator setting. As the reference level changes, the input attenuator
setting is changed to keep the power levels less than the selected level
at the input mixer. Pressing Preset resets the maximum input mixer
level to −10 dBm. Key Access: Amplitude, More
Input Z Corr 50 75 sets the input impedance for voltage-to-power conversions. The
impedance you select is for computational purposes only, since the
actual impedance is set by internal hardware of 50 Ω (except for Option
1DP). The default is 50 (75 with Option 1DP). Select the computational
input impedance by pressing Input Z Corr 50 75 so that 75 is underlined.
68 Chapter 4
Amplitude
This is useful when measuring a 75 Ω device on an analyzer having a

50 Ω input impedance, and when using a 75 Ω to 50 Ω adapter on the
analyzer input. Key Access: Amplitude, More
Chapter 4 69
Auto Couple
Auto Couple
Auto Couple couples the following functions: resolution bandwidth,
video bandwidth, attenuation, sweep time, center-frequency step, video
bandwidth, and video-bandwidth to resolution-bandwidth ratio.
Coupled functions are functions that are linked. If one function is
changed, the other function is changed. During normal operation, the
sweep time, resolution bandwidth, and video bandwidth are coupled to
span to yield optimum performance.
70 Chapter 4
Brightness
Brightness
The brightness of the display is controlled by two keys located next to
each other at the upper left-hand corner of the spectrum analyzer,
bordering the display. Twelve levels of brightness are provided; the top
key makes the display brighter, and the lower key darkens the display.
The lowest brightness level causes the display to be completely dark, as
if the instrument were switched off. If the display is completely dark,
press the top brightness button before troubleshooting the instrument.
NOTE The brightness keys do not automatically repeat when they are held
down. To continue to increase or decrease the brightness, the
appropriate key must be pressed repeatedly.
Chapter 4 71
BW/Avg
BW/Avg
The BW/Avg key activates the resolution bandwidth function and
accesses the softkeys that control the bandwidth functions: Resolution
BW Auto Man, Video BW Auto Man, and VBW/RBW Ratio. It also accesses
Video Average On Off.
Resolution BW changes the spectrum analyzers 3 dB resolution bandwidth from 1 kHz

Auto Man to 3 MHz in a 1, 3, 10 sequence using the step keys, and to 5 MHz using
the numeric keypad. As the resolution bandwidth is decreased, the
sweep time is increased to maintain amplitude calibration. Resolution
bandwidth is also related to span. As span is decreased, the resolution
bandwidth is decreased. A “#” mark appears next to Res BW on the
display when it is not coupled. To recouple the resolution bandwidth,
press Resolution BW Auto Man so that Auto is underlined (or press Auto
Couple). The resolution bandwidth can be changed using the step keys,
the knob, or the numeric keypad. Key Access: BW/Avg
Video BW Auto changes the spectrum analyzer post-detection filter from 1 Hz to 3 MHz
Man in a 1, 3, 10 sequence using the step keys.
As the video bandwidth is decreased, the sweep time is increased to
maintain amplitude calibration. A “#” mark appears next to VBW on
the bottom of the spectrum analyzer display when it is not coupled. To
couple the video bandwidth, press Video BW Auto Man so that Auto is
underlined (or press Auto Couple).
NOTE Auto-coupling the video bandwidth function also resets the VBW/RBW
ratio to 0.300 X. If you want to auto-couple the video bandwidth to a
nonstandard ratio, you must set the video bandwidth to auto-couple
before setting the video-bandwidth/resolution-bandwidth ratio.
The video bandwidth can be changed by using the step keys, knob, or
numeric keypad. Key Access: BW/Avg
VBW/RBW Ratio selects the ratio between the video and resolution bandwidths. If signal
responses near the noise level are visually masked by the noise, the
ratio can be set to less than 1 to lower the noise. The knob and step keys
change the ratio in a 1, 3, 10 sequence. Pressing Preset and Auto Couple
sets the ratio to 0.300 X. The ratio can be changed using the step keys
or the knob. Front-Panel Key Access: BW/Avg
Video Average On initiates a digital averaging routine that averages displayed signals
Off and noise by averaging a number of successive sweeps. The number of
sweeps (N) to average is the number that is set by this function. This
function does not affect the sweep time, bandwidth, or other analog
characteristics of the spectrum analyzer. Annotation on the left side of
the display indicates the current number of sweeps averaged. The
72 Chapter 4
BW/Avg
default number of sweeps is 100. Increasing the number of sweeps will

smooth the trace. To turn off the video averaging function, press Video
Average On Off so that Off is underlined. The number of sweeps can be
entered using the numeric keypad. Key Access: BW/Avg
In single sweep mode (Sweep, Sweep Cont Single (Single)), N sweeps are
taken. After each sweep, the new value of each display point is
averaged in with the previously averaged data using the following
formula:
M–1 1
A avg = -------------- A prior avg + ----- A m
M M
Where:
A avg = new average value
A prior avg = average from prior sweep
A m = measured value on current sweep
M = number of current sweep
In continuous sweep mode (Sweep, Sweep Cont Single (Cont)), the same
sequence is followed until M=N. At that point, the sweeps continue
rather than stopping. For each new sweep, the current sweeps
measured value divided by N is added to (N-1)/N times the prior
average, creating a weighted rolling average.
If any measurement parameter, such as Center Freq, Span, Amplitude,
or N, is changed while Video Average is On, the video average counter is
reset to 0, i.e. M=0, and the trace average resets. If the analyzer is in
single sweep mode, a new set of sweeps is taken only after Sweep Cont
Single (Single) is pressed again.
Chapter 4 73
Det/Demod
Det/Demod
Det/Demod accesses the softkeys controlling demodulation functions,
detector functions, the speaker, and dwell time.
Detector accesses the Detector menu keys which allow you to select between
Peak, Sample, and Negative Peak detection. When sample detection is
selected, Smpl appears in the upper-left corner of the screen. Sample
detection is used primarily to display noise or noise-like signals. This
detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude
measurement of non noise-like signals. In sample mode, the
instantaneous signal value at the present display point is placed in
memory. Sample detection is activated automatically for noise level
markers or during video averaging.
When peak detection is selected, Peak appears in the upper-left corner
of the screen. Peak detection is used primarily when measuring signals
out of the noise floor. Peak detection obtains the maximum video signal
between the last display point and the present display point and stores
this value in memory. Peak detection is selected at power on and by
pressing Preset.
Negative peak detection functions the same as peak detection, but
selects the minimum video signal. When Negative Peak is selected, Neg
appears in the upper- left corner of the screen. Negative peak detection
is used to find signals that are close to, but below the noise floor. This
detection should not be used to make the most accurate amplitude
measurements of signals. Key Access: Det/Demod
Demod accesses the softkeys to select AM demodulation or turn demodulation

Off. Key Access: Det/Demod
Speaker On Off turns the internal speaker on and off. The volume from the speaker is
controlled by the front-panel volume control knob. Pressing Preset sets
Speaker On Off to On.
NOTE It is normal to hear clicking sounds when the Auto Alignment function
is On and the analyzer is in Zero Span. During retrace, a small portion
of the analyzer circuitry is realigned using relays. It is the rapid
switching of these relays during retrace that causes the clicking sounds.
To eliminate the clicking sounds, set Auto Alignment Off. When this is
done, the Align Now All function should be performed periodically.
Refer to “Specifications and Characteristics” for more information on
how often to perform Align Now All when Auto Align is Off.
Key Access: Det/Demod
74 Chapter 4
Det/Demod
Dwell Time On Off sets the dwell time for the marker pause, during which demodulation
can take place. The dwell time can be set from 2 milliseconds to
100 seconds. Key Access: Det/Demod
Chapter 4 75
Display
Display
Display accesses the Title menu keys which allow title entry, and the
Preferences menu keys which allow you to turn the graticule,
annotation, time/date, or inverse video, on or off. Display softkeys also
include Display Line On Off, Threshold On Off, and Contrast.
Display Line On activates an adjustable horizontal line that is used as a visual reference
Off line. The line, which can be used for trace arithmetic, has amplitude
values that correspond to its vertical position when compared to the
reference level. The value of the display line appears in the active
function block and on the left side of the display. The display line can be
adjusted using the step keys, knob, or numeric keypad. Pressing any
digit, 0 through 9, on the numeric keypad brings up the selected
terminator menu. To deactivate the display line, press Display Line On
Off so that Off is underlined. (Also see the Video (trigger) key
description in the Trig key menu.) Key Access: Display
Threshold On Off sets a lower boundary to the active trace. The threshold line “clips”
signals that appear below the line when this function is on. The
boundary is defined in amplitude units that correspond to its vertical
position when compared to the reference level.
The value of the threshold appears in the active-function block and on
the lower- left side of the display. The threshold level does not influence
the trace memory or marker position. The peaks found by the markers
must be at least the peak- excursion value above the threshold level.
The value of the threshold level can be changed using the step keys, the
knob, or the numeric keypad. Pressing any digit, 0 through 9, on the
numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu. If a threshold
is active, press Threshold On Off until Off is underlined to turn the
threshold display off. The threshold value affects peak searching even
when the Threshold function is set to Off. The Threshold function is
also activated by the Pk Threshold function in the Search menu. Key
Access: Display
Title accesses the following Title menu keys which allows you to execute,
change, or clear a title on your display. Key Access: Display
Change Title allows you to write a 53-character title across the top of
the display. The marker readout may interfere with the
last 26 characters. The markers can be turned off by
pressing Marker, Marker All Off. Pressing Change Title
accesses the softkey menus that contain the available
characters and symbols.
76 Chapter 4
Display
A programming command can be entered in the display

title area. It can then be executed from the front panel
by pressing Display, Title, Execute Title.
The display title will remain until either Change Title is
pressed again, or a trace is recalled that was previously
saved with a title. A display title can also be cleared by
using the clear function. Press Display, Title, Clear Title.
Key Access: Display, Title
Clear Title allows you to clear a title from the front-panel display.
Execute Title executes a programming command which appears in
the display title area of the spectrum analyzer. The
Change Title function can be used to print programming
commands in the title area of the display. The
commands can then be executed from the front panel of
the spectrum analyzer, without an external computer,
by pressing the Execute Title softkey.
Preferences accesses a menu of the following display functions which allow you to
turn the graticule, annotation, time/date, and inverse video on or off.
Key Access: Display
Graticule On Off turns the display graticule on and off.
Key Access: Display, Preferences
Annotation On Off turns the screen annotation on or off, however,
softkey annotation will remain on the screen. The
screen annotation may not be required for prints or
during remote operation. Key Access: Display,
Preferences
Contrast allows you to adjust the contrast of your spectrum analyzer display.
Key Access: Display
Inverse Video On with On underlined, inverse video changes the display to have dark
Off annotation against a light background. The spectrum analyzer is
shipped from the factory with Inverse Video Off, which displays light
annotation against a dark background. Key Access: Display
Chapter 4 77
Enter
Enter
Pressing the Enter key terminates and enters into the spectrum
analyzer a numerical value that has been entered from the front panel
using the numeric keypad. (For most applications, it is better to use the
units menu keys.)
78 Chapter 4
Esc
Esc
The Esc (escape) key deactivates the active function and blanks the
active function text from the display. No data can be accidentally
entered using the knob, step keys, or numeric keypad.
Pressing Esc will also abort a print (if one is in progress), clear input or
output overloads, and clear most error messages from the display.
Chapter 4 79
File
File
File accesses the softkey menus used to load, save, and delete data from
spectrum analyzer memory.
Load accesses a softkey menu that allows you to load a saved spectrum
analyzer state (State), select the trace in which trace data is to be loaded
(Trace A B C) and load the trace data, load the current limit line tables
(Limits), or load amplitude correction factors (Ampcor).
When loading limit line tables or amplitude-correction factors, press
Limits or Ampcor, enter the trace register number, and press Enter. Valid
trace register numbers are 0 through the maximum register number.
The maximum register number is the number displayed during a save
or load operation. If a display title is present, it is loaded with the trace
data (but not with the limit line table or the amplitude-correction
factors). If the display title does not exceed 34 characters, the time and
date when the data was stored will also be displayed.
See “Using Instrument Features” in the HP ESA-L1500A Measurement
Guide for more information. Key Access: File
Load Now loads a selected state, trace, limit line table, or
amplitude- correction factor. Key Access: File, Load
Save accesses a softkey menu that allows you to store state data (State),
select the trace in which trace data is to be saved (Trace A B C) and save
the trace data, save limit line tables (Limits), and save
amplitude-correction factors (Ampcor) in spectrum analyzer memory.
Saving state data saves the spectrum analyzer settings, but not the
trace data. Saving trace data saves both the trace data and the state
data.
States and traces are retained in spectrum analyzer memory even if the
instrument is turned off or Preset is pressed.
See “Using Instrument Features” in the HP ESA-L1500A Measurement
Guide for more information. Key Access: File
New Filename accesses a softkey menu for selecting display title
characters for the naming of files. New Filename does
not appear on the menu when Internal Lock On Off is On.
Filenames are not case-sensitive. They can be up to
eight characters long. The extensions are assigned
automatically and indicate whether the file is a trace,
state, limit line or amplitude correction factor. The
filename cannot be identical to the name of another file,
and cannot contain spaces, commas, backslashes, or
80 Chapter 4
File
periods. Valid characters include letters of the

alphabet, numbers 0 through 9 and special characters
‘˜!@#$%ˆ&()-_{}’ only. Key Access: File, Save
Save Now stores a selected state, trace, limit line table, or
amplitude-correction factor in spectrum analyzer
memory. Save Now is not available when Internal Lock
On Off is On —it is replaced with (Locked).
Key Access: File, Save
Delete accesses the delete softkey menu. Select State or Trace to clear an
instrument state or trace. Select Limits to clear the current limit line
table, or Ampcor to clear the current amplitude-correction factors table.
Key Access: File
Delete Now allows you to delete a selected state, trace, limit line
table, or amplitude-correction factor from spectrum
analyzer memory. Key Access: File, Delete
Erase Internal accesses a softkey menu to clear data from spectrum analyzer memory.
Selections include All States, All Traces, All Limits, All Ampcor, or All
Memory. Key Access: File
Internal Lock On locks all the current internal state and trace registers against further
Off data storage, when On is underlined. Pressing Preset sets Internal Lock
On Off to Off.
NOTE When Internal Lock On Off is set to On, none of the state registers can be
overwritten.
Key Access: File
Chapter 4 81
Freq Count
Freq Count
Freq Count activates the Marker Normal function if there are no markers,
and then sets Marker Count On Off to On.
Marker Count On turns on the marker counter when On is underlined. If no marker is

Off active before Marker Count On Off is pressed, a marker is activated at the
center of the display. Press Marker Count On Off (so that Off is
underlined), to turn the marker counter off. Press Count Resln Auto Man
to change the marker counter resolution to an uncoupled value.
An (*) may appear in the upper right area of the display along with the
message Marker Count. The ratio of the resolution bandwidth to span
must be greater than 0.002 for the marker count function to work
properly. Marker Count Widen Res BW appears on the display if the
bandwidth to span ratio is less than 0.002. Widen RES BW indicates
that the resolution bandwidth must be increased.
Key Access: Freq Count
Resolution Auto allows the resolution of the marker counter to be selected manually or
Man auto- coupled. The marker counter has a resolution range of 1 Hz to
100 kHz. The available resolution values are 1 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz,
1 kHz, 10 kHz, and 100 kHz. The resolution can be changed by using
the step keys or by entering the resolution using the numeric keypad or
knob. The marker counter resolution can be auto coupled to the span by
pressing Resolution Auto Man so that Auto is underlined. The Resolution
Auto Man softkey function is not affected by pressing Auto Couple.
Key Access: Freq Count
82 Chapter 4
Frequency
Frequency
Frequency activates the center frequency function, and accesses the
menu of frequency functions. The center frequency, or start and stop
frequency values appear below the graticule on the display.
Although the spectrum analyzer allows entry of frequencies greater
than the specified frequency range, using frequencies greater than the
frequency span of the spectrum analyzer is not recommended
NOTE When changing both the center frequency and the span, change the
frequency first since the span can be limited by the frequency value.
Center Freq activates the center-frequency function which allows you to select a
frequency to be centered on the display. Key Access: Frequency
Start Freq sets the frequency at the left side of the graticule. The left and right
sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies.
When these frequencies are activated, their values are displayed below
the graticule in place of center frequency and span.
Key Access: Frequency
Stop Freq sets the frequency at the right side of the graticule. The left and right
sides of the graticule correspond to the start and stop frequencies.
When these frequencies are activated, their values are displayed below
the graticule in place of center frequency and span.
Key Access: Frequency
CF Step Auto Man changes the step size for the center-frequency function. Once a step size
has been selected and the center frequency function is activated, the
step keys change center frequency by the step-size value. The step size
function is useful for finding harmonics and sidebands beyond the
spectrum analyzers current frequency span. When auto-coupled, the
center frequency step size is set to one graticule (10 percent of the
span). Key Access: Frequency
Freq Offset allows the user to input a frequency offset value that is added to the
frequency readout, to account for frequency conversions external to the
spectrum analyzer. Offset entries are added to all frequency readouts
including marker, start frequency, and stop frequency. Entering an
offset does not affect the trace. Offsets are not added to the span.
Frequency offsets are entered using the numeric keypad.
When a frequency offset is entered, its value appears on the bottom of
the display (as opposed to reference level offsets, which appear on the
left side of the display). To eliminate an offset, press Freq Offset, 0, and
Enter. Pressing Preset also sets the offset to zero. Key Access: Frequency
Chapter 4 83
Frequency
Signal Track On moves the signal that is nearest to the active marker to the center of
Off the display and keeps the signal there. Sig-Trk appears in the
upper-right corner of the display. An (*) may appear in the upper-right
corner of the display while the spectrum analyzer is verifying that it
has the correct signal.
Pressing Signal Track On Off, Preset, Marker Normal, or Marker All Off
turns off the signal track function.
When signal track is on and the span is reduced, an automatic zoom is
performed: the span is reduced in steps so that the signal remains at
the center of the display. If the span is zero, signal track cannot be
activated. Key Access: Frequency
84 Chapter 4
Marker
Marker
Marker accesses the marker control keys which select the type and
number of markers and turn them on and off. Markers are
diamond-shaped characters that identify points of traces and allow the
traces to be manipulated and controlled on the display. Up to four
markers may appear on the display simultaneously; only one can be
controlled at a time. The marker that is controlled is called the “active”
marker. Pressing Marker activates the Marker Normal softkey.
Marker Normal activates a single frequency marker at the center frequency on the
active trace if a marker is not already displayed. If a marker is
displayed before the Marker Normal function is enabled, the marker is
enabled at the position of the currently selected marker. Use the data
controls to position the marker. Annotation in the active function block
and in the upper-right corner indicates the frequency and amplitude of
the marker. The marker stays on the trace at the horizontal screen
position where it was left unless Signal Track On Off, or a “marker to”
softkey function (such as Mkr → CF, Mkr → RL, Mkr → CF STEP, Mkr ∆ Span,
or Min Search) is selected. Pressing Marker Normal turns off the
marker-delta function. Key Access: Marker
Marker D activates a second marker at the position of the first marker. (If no
marker is present, two markers appear at the center of the display.) The
amplitude and frequency of the first marker is fixed, and the second
marker is under your control. Annotation in the active function block
and in the upper-right corner of the display indicates the frequency and
amplitude differences between the two markers. The delta marker
readout will be incorrect if the scale type is changed between log and
linear.
NOTE If there are already four markers when Marker ∆ is pressed, a nonactive
marker disappears, the active marker becomes a reference marker, and
the delta marker becomes the active marker. If marker noise is turned
on while using Marker ∆ and the noise marker si placed on the noise
floor, the marker readout displays signal-to-noise.
Key Access: Marker
Select Marker selects one of the four possible markers. A marker can be turned on
1234 once it is selected. A marker that has already been turned on will
become active when it is selected. If a marker has already been turned
on and assigned to a specific trace it will become active on that trace
and the Marker Trace Auto A B C softkey will have the appropriate trace
letter underlined. Key Access: Marker
Chapter 4 85
Marker
Marker # On Off turns the selected marker on or off. The marker which is currently
selected by the Select Marker 1 2 3 4 key, will be turned on or off. When a
new marker is turned on by pressing Marker # On Off, the Marker Trace
Auto A B C function always switches to Auto and the marker is put on
the trace that is selected by the Auto mode. Key Access: Marker
Marker Noise On reads out the average noise level, referenced to a 1 Hz noise power
Off bandwidth. If no marker is present, a marker appears at the center of
the display. The root-mean-square noise level (the mean value of the
32 display points about the marker) normalized to a 1 Hz noise power
bandwidth, is read out. The sample detector is activated. If Marker
Noise is turned On while a Marker ∆ is selected, the signal-to-noise
level is measured. Key Access: Marker
Mkr Readout accesses a menu which allows you a selection of specific marker
information. The selections include Frequency, Period, Time, and Inverse
Time. Key Access: Marker
Marker All Off turns off all of the markers, including markers used for marker track
and demodulation. Marker annotation is also removed.
Key Access: Marker
Marker Trace Auto assigns a marker to a trace. Pressing Marker Trace Auto A B C will
ABC activate a marker on trace A if there are no markers turned on. If a
marker is currently active, press Marker Trace Auto A B C until A, B, or C
are underlined. The active marker will be moved to the selected trace.
Selecting the Auto mode will move the marker to the trace that is
automatically selected. The selection order is to first look for a trace in
the clear-write mode, in the order of trace A, then trace B, then trace C.
If no traces are currently being written, it will select a trace in the
view-store mode, again in the order of trace A, B, then C.
Key Access: Marker, More
86 Chapter 4
Measure
Measure
Measure accesses softkey menus that edit limit line functions (Limits),
determine the N dB bandwidth of a signal (N dB Points On Off),
determine % AM of a signal (% AM On Off), and determine third-order
intercept (TOI On Off).
Limits accesses the following Limits menu keys. Limit lines can be created by
the user to test trace data. A limit line is a test limit made up of a series
of line segments, positioned according to frequency and amplitude
within the measurement range of the spectrum analyzer. There can be
one upper limit line and one lower limit line which set maximum and
minimum test limits.
Limit Display Y N Auto
displays any portion of the limit lines that are currently
within the spectrum analyzer display boundary. If Y
(yes) is underlined, the limit lines are displayed. If N
(no) is underlined, they are not displayed. If Auto is
underlined, the display of the limit lines is dependent
on Limit Test On Off. The limit lines will be displayed
while the limit test function is turned on, otherwise
they will be turned off. Key Access: Measure, Limits
Limit Test On Off turns the limit line testing and (if Limit Display Auto is
selected) the display of the limit lines on and off. When
limit line testing is enabled, every measurement sweep
of trace A is compared to the limit lines. If trace A is at
or within the bounds of the limit lines, LIMIT PASS is
displayed. If trace A is out of the limit line boundaries,
LIMIT FAIL is displayed. Key Access: Measure, Limits
X Axis Units Freq
Time selects whether limit lines will be entered using
frequency or sweep time to define the segments. They
can be specified as a table of limit line segments of
amplitude versus frequency, or of amplitude versus
time. Time values are evaluated with respect to the
spectrum analyzer sweep time. A time value of zero
corresponds to the start of the sweep, which is at the
left edge of the graticule.
Switching the limit line definition between frequency
and time will erase the current limit line table. The
message If you are sure, press key again to
purge data will appear. Press X Axis Units Freq Time
again to purge the limit line table and switch between
frequency and time. Key Access: Measure, Limits
Chapter 4 87
Measure
Limits Fixed Rel allows you to choose fixed or relative limit lines. The
fixed (Fixed) type uses the current limit line as a
reference with fixed frequency and amplitude values.
The relative (Rel) setting causes the current limit line
value to be relative to the displayed center frequency
and reference-level amplitude values. When limit lines
are specified with time, rather than frequency, the Rel
setting only affects the amplitude values. The current
amplitude values will be relative to the displayed
reference- level amplitude, but the time values will
always start at the left edge of the graticule.
As an example, assume you have a frequency limit line.
If the limit line is specified as fixed, entering a limit
line segment with a frequency coordinate of 300 MHz
displays the limit line segment at 300 MHz. If the same
limit line table is specified as relative, it is displayed
relative to the spectrum analyzer center frequency and
reference level. If the center frequency is at 1.0 GHz, a
relative limit line segment with a frequency coordinate
of 300 MHz will display the limit line segment at 1.3
GHz. If the amplitude component of the relative limit
line segment is –10 dB, then −10 dB is added to the
reference level value to obtain the amplitude of the
given component (reference level offset included).
A limit line entered as fixed may be changed to relative,
and one entered as relative may be changed to fixed.
When changing between fixed and relative limit lines,
the frequency and amplitude values in the limit line
table change so that the limit line remains in the same
position for the current frequency and amplitude
settings of the spectrum analyzer. If a time and
amplitude limit line is used, the amplitude values
change but the time values remain the same.
Key Access: Measure, Limits
Edit Limits allows you to edit the current limit line tables by
accessing the Select Line Upper Lower, and Edit Line
keys. Use Delete Limits in the Limits menu to dispose of
the current limit line table. Key Access: Measure, Limits
Select Line Upper Lower selects upper or lower limit line
tables.
With Lower selected on the Select Line Upper Lower
softkey, Edit Line allows you to view or edit the lower
limit line table. Up to 30 entries are allowed for the
lower limit line table. With the lower limit line table
format, the coordinates for the lower limit line are
specified, but none are specified for the upper limit line.
88 Chapter 4
Measure
Even if upper limit line values exist, the lower limit

line values are treated as a separate table from the
upper limit line values. The lower limit line entries can
have independent frequency (or time) and amplitude
coordinates from upper limit line table entries.
With Upper selected on the Select Line Upper Lower
softkey, Edit Line allows you to view or edit the upper
limit line table. Up to 30 entries are allowed for the
upper limit line table. With the upper limit line table
format, the coordinates of the upper limit line are
specified, but none are specified for the lower limit line.
Even if lower limit line values exist, the upper limit
line values are treated as a separate table from the
lower limit line values. The upper limit line entries can
have independent frequency (or time) and amplitude
coordinates from lower limit line table entries. Key
Access: Measure, Limits
Edit Line accesses the following Edit Line menu keys:
Segment
allows you to create or edit a limit line segment. Limit

lines are created by entering frequency (time) and
amplitude values into a limit line table. The frequency
(time) and amplitude values specify a coordinate point
from which a limit line segment is drawn. The
coordinate point is the lowest frequency or time point of
the line segment. Limit lines are constructed from left
to right. To select a segment, press Segment, enter the
segment number you wish to specify, then press a units
key.
Up to 30 segments can be specified per limit line table.
Key Access: Measure, Limits, Edit Limits, Edit Line
Frequency
(appears in menu when the X Axis Units Freq Time key

has Freq underlined) allows you to enter a frequency
value into a limit line table. Key Access: Measure,
Limits, Edit Limits, Edit Line
Time
(appears in menu when the X Axis Units Freq Time key

has Time underlined) allows you to enter a time value
into a limit line table. Key Access: Measure, Limits,
Edit Limits, Edit Line
Chapter 4 89
Measure
Amplitude
allows you to enter an amplitude value into a limit line

table. Key Access: Measure, Limits, Edit Limits, Edit Line
Type
accesses the following Type menu keys used to select a

type of limit line:
Slope The slope key draws a straight line between the
coordinate point of the current segment and the
coordinate point of the next segment, producing limit
line values for all frequencies between the two points.
Key Access: Measure, Limits, Edit Limits, Edit Line, Type
Flat The flat key draws a zero-slope line between the
coordinate point of the current segment and the
coordinate point of the next segment, producing limit
line values equal in amplitude for all frequencies
between the two points. If the amplitude values of the
two segments differ, the limit line “steps” to the
frequency value of the second segment. Key Access:
Measure, Limits, Edit Limits, Edit Line, Type
Point The point key specifies a limit value for the

coordinate point. It specifies a limit at a single
frequency or time, and for no other frequency/time
points. For an upper limit line, a point segment is
indicated by a line drawn from the coordinate point,
vertically off the top of the screen. For a lower limit
line, a point segment is indicated by a line drawn from
the coordinate point vertically off the bottom of the
screen. The line will continue to the right edge of the
display, but testing stops at the defined point.
The point segment type should be used as the last
segment in the limit line table. However, if the last
segment in the table is not specified, an implicit point is
automatically used. If a point segment at the right edge
of the display is not desired, add a last-point segment to
the limit line table that is higher in frequency than the
displayed stop frequency. Key Access: Measure, Limits,
Edit Limits, Edit Line, Type
Del Segment
deletes the limit line entry for the selected segment

number. Front-Panel Key Access: Measure, Limits,
Edit Limits, Edit Line
Delete Limits allows you to purge data from the limit line tables. Key
Access: Measure, Limits
90 Chapter 4
Measure
N dB Points On Off automatically places two markers at points N dB from the highest point
on the highest displayed signal, and determines the frequency
difference between the two markers. N dB is the active function and the
value of N is set by the user. The measurement defaults to -3 dB when it
is first turned on. The measurement runs continuously, re-executing at
the end of each sweep.
No other signal can appear on the display within N dB of the highest
signal. The measured signal cannot have more than one peak that is
greater than or equal to N dB. A signal must be greater than the peak
excursion above the threshold to be identified. The setting for peak
excursion may be increased from the 6 dB default value so that noise
will not be identified as signals. Increasing the value too much may
cause a smaller signal to be missed or misinterpreted as part of a larger
signal. The amplitude scale may be either linear or logarithmic.
Key Access: Measure
% AM On Off determines the percent of amplitude modulation of the largest

displayed signal and its two sidebands. The sidebands are assumed to
be entirely from amplitude modulation. If there are differences in the
sideband amplitude, the larger value is used. The measurement runs
continuously, re-executing at the end of each sweep.
The three signals that make up the AM signal, must all be displayed.
The frequency spacing of the sideband signals must be the same within
the span accuracy of the measurement. All of the signals must be
greater than the peak excursion above the threshold. The amplitude
scale may be either linear or logarithmic. Key Access: Measure
TOI On Off finds the third-order intercept of the two highest amplitude signals and
the two associated distortion products. The measurement compensates
for unequal test signal amplitude. The measurement runs continuously,
re-executing at the end of each sweep. The units for the displayed value
can be selected by pressing the Amptd Units softkey. The two test signals
and the two associated distortion products must all be displayed for the
measurement to function. The relative amplitudes and frequencies of
the displayed signals must fit the TOI pattern. All of the signals must
be greater than the peak excursion above the threshold.
Key Access: Measure
Chapter 4 91
More
More
The More key is used to move between successive pages in multi-page
menus. When the More key is active, a designation appears in the more
field on the screen (such as 1 of 3), to show that there are more menu
pages available.
92 Chapter 4
Peak Search
Peak Search
Peak Search immediately places the currently selected marker on the
signal having the highest peak on the display. If no marker is active, a
marker is created and placed on the highest peak.
Peak Search is an immediate execution key. Pressing Peak Search does
not change the key menu activated on the display. A peak search may
be performed while in any key menu.
Chapter 4 93
Preset
Preset
Preset provides a convenient starting point for making most
measurements. Pressing Preset displays menu keys used for accessing
the operating modes available for your spectrum analyzer. See the
following Preset Conditions Table, for the conditions established by
pressing Preset.
The instrument preset function performs a processor test, but does not
affect alignment data. Pressing Preset clears both the input and output
buffers, but does not clear trace B. The amplitude values of trace C are
set to the reference level. Amplitude-correction factors are turned off.
Limit line testing is turned off, but the limit line tables remain in
spectrum analyzer memory. The status byte is set to 0.
NOTE Turning the spectrum analyzer on performs an instrument preset.

Turning on the spectrum analyzer also fetches alignment data;
completes a processor test; clears trace B, trace C, and both the input
and output buffers; turns off amplitude-correction factors; turns off
limit line testing; and sets the status byte to 0. The last state of the
spectrum analyzer (before it was switched off) is recalled when Power
On IP Last is set so that Last is underlined.
Table 4-1 Preset Conditions
Amplitude correction off

factors
Amplitude units default values
Annotation and on
graticule display
Attenuation 10 dB (auto-coupled)
Center frequency 750 MHz
CF step size 10% of span
Coupled functions all set to AUTO
Detector positive peak
Display line level 2.5 divisions below reference level, display off
Frequency offset 0 Hz
Limit line testing off
Log scale 10 dB/division
Marker counter off
94 Chapter 4
Preset
Marker counter auto-coupled

resolution
Markers off
Mixer level –10 dBm
Reference level 0 dBm in power-on units
Reference level offset 0 dB
Reference level top (10th) graticule

position
Resolution bandwidth 3 MHz (auto-coupled)
Span 1.5 GHz
SRQ mask octal 50
Start Frequency 0 Hz
Stop Frequency 1.5 GHz
State registers unaffected
Sweep continuous
Sweep Time 5 ms
Threshold level one graticule above baseline, display off
Title cleared
Trace A clear-write
Trace B store-blank
Trace C store-blank, at reference level
Trace registers unaffected
Trigger free run
VBW/RBW ratio 0.3
Video averaging off
Video bandwidth 1 MHz (auto-coupled)
Chapter 4 95
Print
Print
Option A4H (HP-IB and Parallel) and 1AX (RS-232 and Parallel) only.
Print initiates an output of the display data, without an external
controller, to a previously specified graphics printer. Refer to Chapter 1
of this manual or the HP ESA-L1500A Spectrum Analyzer
Programmer’s Guide for detailed information about printing.
Press the Print key to immediately print the screen to the
currently-defined printer. The screen remains frozen (no further sweeps
are taken) until the data transfer to the printer is complete. Press
System, Printer to access menu keys to redefine the print device and
port. Refer to the System key description in this chapter for more
information about the structure and definitions of the printer and port
keys.
If you need to abort a print in progress, use the Esc (escape) key.
NOTE Printing requires an optional interface. Generally, spectrum analyzers

printing to a printer with an HP-IB interface set the printer address to
1. Spectrum analyzers using the RS-232 interface to print, must have
the baud rate set to match the baud rate of the printer being used. The
HP ESA-L1500A Spectrum Analyzer Programmer’s Guide, included
with the optional interfaces, details the different interfaces. Refer to
Chapter 1 for more information about printing.
96 Chapter 4
Search
Search
The Search key accesses the following marker and search function
menu keys.
Max Pk → CF places a marker on the highest peak, and then changes the spectrum
analyzer settings so that the peak is placed at the center frequency.
Key Access: Search
Mkr → CF changes the spectrum analyzer settings so that the frequency of the
marker becomes the center frequency. Key Access: Search
Mkr → Ref Lvl changes the spectrum analyzer settings so that the amplitude of the
active marker becomes the reference level. Key Access: Search
Next Peak places the marker on the next highest peak. The signal peak must
exceed the peak threshold value. If there is no peak, the marker will not
move. (Also see the Peak Excursn and Pk Threshold key descriptions.)
Key Access: Search
Next Pk Right moves the marker to the next peak to the right of the current marker.
The signal peak must exceed the peak threshold value. If there is no
peak to the right, the marker will not move. (Also see the Peak Excursn
and Pk Threshold key descriptions.) Key Access: Search
Next Pk Left moves the marker to the next peak to the left of the current marker.
The signal peak must exceed the peak threshold value. If there is no
peak to the left, the marker will not move. (Also see the Peak Excursn
and Pk Threshold key descriptions.) Key Access: Search
Peak Excursn sets the minimum amplitude variation of signals that the marker can
identify as a peak. If a value of 10 dB is selected, the marker moves only
to peaks that rise and fall more than 10 dB above the peak threshold
value. Pressing Preset or turning on power resets the excursion to 6 dB,
and the threshold to 90 dB below the reference level.
NOTE Two signal peaks, which are so close together that the amplitude drop
between them is less than the peak-excursion value, are not recognized
as two peaks. A signal peak is recognized only if it has a peak excursion
drop above the noise floor, on both sides of the signal.
When the peak excursion value is 6 dB or higher, the marker-peaking

functions may not recognize signals less than 6 dB above the noise floor.
To correct this, when measuring signals near the noise floor, the
excursion value can be reduced even further. To prevent the marker
Chapter 4 97
Search
from identifying noise as signals, reduce the noise floor variance to a

value less than the peak-excursion value by reducing the video
bandwidth or by using video averaging. Key Access: Search
Pk Threshold sets a lower boundary to the active trace. The threshold line “clips”
signals that appear below the line when this function is on. The
boundary is defined in amplitude units that correspond to its vertical
position when compared to the reference level. In other words, if the
reference level is -10 dBm, and the threshold is set to −75 dBm, the
threshold will remain 65 dB below the reference level as the reference
level is changed.
The value of the threshold appears in the active-function block and on
the lower- left side of the display. The threshold level does not influence
the trace memory or marker position. The peaks found by the markers
must be at least the peak- excursion value above the threshold level.
The value of the threshold level can be changed using the step keys, the
knob, or the numeric keypad. Pressing any digit, 0 through 9, on the
numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu. The threshold
value affects peak searching functions (except for Peak Search) even
when the Pk Threshold function is set to On. Key Access: Search, More
Pk-Pk Search finds and displays the frequency and amplitude differences between the
highest and lowest trace points. Pressing Pk-Pk Search performs the
routine similar to pressing the following keys: Peak Search, Mkr ∆, and
Mkr → Min. Key Access: Search, More
Min Search moves the active marker to the minimum detected amplitude value.
Key Access: Search, More
Mkr → Start changes the start frequency so that it is equal to the frequency of the
active marker. This moves the active marker to the left edge of the
display. Key Access: Search, More
Mkr → Stop changes the stop frequency so that it is equal to the frequency of the
active marker. This moves the active marker to the right edge of the
display. Key Access: Search, More
Mkr → CF Step changes the center-frequency step size to match the value of the active
marker. Press Frequency then CF Step Auto Man to view the step size. If
marker delta is active, the step size will be set to the frequency
difference between the markers. Key Access: Search, More
Mkr ∆ → Span sets the start and stop frequencies to the values of the delta markers.
The start and stop frequencies will not be set if the delta marker is off.
Key Access: Search, More
98 Chapter 4
Single Sweep
Single Sweep
Single Sweep changes the sweep control to single sweep if the spectrum
analyzer is in the continuous sweep mode, and executes a sweep after
the trigger condition is met. If the analyzer is already in single sweep,
pressing Single Sweep re- executes a new sweep after the trigger
condition is met.
Chapter 4 99
Source Amptd
Source Amptd
Source Amptd accesses the tracking generator key functions. (Options
1DN or 1DQ only) Without Option 1DN or 1DQ, pressing Source Amptd
will cause the error message “Required option not installed” to
appear on the analyzer display.
Amplitude On Off activates (On) or deactivates (Off) the output power of the tracking
generator. The power level can then be adjusted using the numeric
keypad, step keys, or knob. Pressing any digit, 0 through 9, on the
numeric keypad brings up the selected terminator menu. See
specifications and characteristics in Chapter 9 for the available output
power for your tracking generator. Key Access: Source Amptd
Power Sweep On activates (On) or deactivates (Off) the power-sweep function. The value
Off of the power-sweep range is displayed in the active-function block when
Power Sweep On Off is set to On. The analyzer continues to sweep the
specified frequency range when power sweep is on. (To do a power
sweep at a fixed frequency, set the analyzer to zero span at the desired
frequency). The available power-sweep range is a function of the source
attenuator setting. See “Specifications” for the available power sweep
range.
The output power of the tracking generator is swept according to the
sweep rate of the spectrum analyzer. The output power is always swept
from the source power setting to a higher power setting (negative
source power sweep values are not allowed).
Power-sweep measurements are particularly useful in making gain
compression measurements or output power versus frequency
measurements. Key Access: Source Amptd
Attenuation Auto allows you to select between automatic and manual adjustment of the
Man tracking generator’s switching attenuator. The HP ESA-L1500A can be
manually adjusted from 0 to 60 dB in 10 dB steps. When auto-coupled,
the attenuation function automatically adjusts the attenuator to yield
the source amplitude level specified by the Amplitude On Off softkey
function. Set Attenuation Auto Man so that Man is underlined
(decoupled) for power sweeps greater than 10 dB.
Key Access: Source Amptd
Amptd Step Auto allows the user to set the step size of the power level, power offset, and
Man power- sweep range functions of the tracking generator. The default
setting is one vertical scale division. Key Access: Source Amptd
100 Chapter 4
Source Amptd
Amptd Offset offsets the displayed power of the tracking generator. Using the
amplitude offset capability of the tracking generator allows you to take
system losses or gains into account, thereby displaying the actual
power delivered to the device under test. Key Access: Source Amptd
Chapter 4 101
Span
Span
The Span key activates the Span function and accesses the menu of
span functions. Pressing Span allows the user to change the frequency
range symmetrically about the center frequency. The frequency-span
readout describes the total displayed frequency range; to determine
frequency span per horizontal graticule division, divide the frequency
span by 10.
Span Zoom finds the highest signal peak on the display. If a marker is not already
on the peak, it places a marker there, turns on the signal-track
function, and activates the span function. Span Zoom then requires the
user to enter a target span. Once entered, the analyzer reduces the
span in steps, keeping the signal centered on the screen until the
entered span is reached. Pressing Span Zoom performs the routine
similar to pressing the following keys: Peak Search, Frequency, Signal
Track On Off (On), and Span. Key Access: Span
NOTE Span Zoom leaves the spectrum analyzer in Signal Track mode.
Full Span changes the spectrum analyzer span to full span showing the full
frequency range of the spectrum analyzer. Full span turns Signal Track
On Off to Off. Key Access: Span
Zero Span changes the frequency span to zero. Zero span turns Signal Track On Off
to Off. Key Access: Span
Last Span changes the spectrum analyzer frequency span to the previous span
setting. Key Access: Span
102 Chapter 4
Standby
Standby
The Standby key removes power from the spectrum analyzer, except for
a small portion of circuitry inside the switching power supply. No
internal timebase circuitry, or any other function outside of the power
supply is powered when the spectrum analyzer is in “standby.”
Chapter 4 103
Sweep
Sweep
The Sweep key activates the Sweep Time function, and accesses the
sweep menu keys: Sweep Time Auto Man, Sweep Cont Single, and
Swp Coupling SR SA.
Sweep Time Auto selects the length of time in which the spectrum analyzer sweeps the
Man displayed frequency span. In all spans, the sweep time varies from
5 milliseconds to 2000 seconds. Reducing the sweep time increases the
rate of sweeps. The sweep time can be changed using the step keys, the
knob, or the numeric keypad. Key Access: Sweep
Sweep Cont Single switches the spectrum analyzer between the continuous-sweep mode
and the single-sweep mode. If the spectrum analyzer is in single-sweep
mode, Single is underlined. Press Single on the front panel, to enable a
sweep when in single-sweep mode. When continuous-sweep mode is in
use, one sweep follows another as soon as it is triggered. Pressing
Preset, or turning the power on, selects continuous sweep.
Key Access: Sweep
Swp Coupling SR selects stimulus-response (SR) or spectrum-analyzer (SA) auto-coupled

SA sweep times. In stimulus-response mode, auto-coupled sweep times are
usually much faster for swept-response measurements.
Stimulus-response auto-coupled sweep times are typically valid in
stimulus-response measurements when the system’s frequency span is
less than 20 times the bandwidth of the device under test.
Key Access: Sweep
104 Chapter 4
System (Local)
System (Local)
System accesses the System menu keys. Pressing System (Local) after
the spectrum analyzer has been placed in the remote mode, places the
spectrum analyzer in the local mode and enables front-panel control.
During remote operation, “R” appears in the upper-right corner of the
screen. A “T”, “L” or “S” may appear during remote operation, indicating
talk, listen, or service request. Pressing the System key removes the “R”
symbol in the upper-right corner.
Printer Option A4H (HP-IB and Parallel) or 1AX (RS-232 and Parallel) only.
Accesses the Printer menu keys which allow you to configure your
spectrum analyzer for printing, and select printer options. See Printer at
the end of this section.
Time/Date accesses the following Time/Date menu keys used to set and display the
real-time clock: Key Access: System
Datemode MDY DMY changes the display of the date from a
month-day-year format to a day-month-year format. It
is set to a month-day- year format when the instrument
is Preset. Key Access: System, Time/Date
Set Time allows you to set the time of the real-time clock. Enter
the time in 24 hour HHMMSS format, using the
numeric keypad and pressing Enter. Valid hour (HH)
values are from 00 to 23. Valid minute (MM) and
second (SS) values are from 00 to 59.
Key Access: System, Time/Date
Set Date allows you to set the date of the real-time clock. Enter
the date in the YYMMDD format using the numeric
keypad and press Enter. Valid year (YY) values are 00
through 99. Valid month (MM) values are from 01 to 12,
and valid day values are from 01 to 31.
Time/Date On Off turns the display of the real-time clock on or off.
Remote Port HP-IB Option A4H (HP-IB and Parallel) only. Selects the remote port to allow
programming from an external controller over HP-IB. It allows the
HP-IB address to be entered using the numeric keypad only. The
default address is 18. Key Access: System
Chapter 4 105
System (Local)
Remote Port Serial Option 1AX (RS-232 and Parallel) only. Selects the remote port to allow
programming from an external controller over a serial bus. It allows the
baud rate to be set using the numeric keypad or step keys only. Baud
rate values are as follows: 110, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200,
38400, 57600, 115200. Key Access: System
Power On IP Last determines the state of the spectrum analyzer when the spectrum
analyzer is powered on. If the Power On function is set to IP, the state of
the spectrum analyzer is the same as it is after Preset is pressed, when
the spectrum analyzer is powered on. If the Power On function is set to
Last, then the state that the spectrum analyzer was in when it was
powered off is recalled.
The setting (IP or Last) of the Power On function is not changed by
pressing Preset. Use the Power On IP Last softkey function to change the
setting of the spectrum analyzer state which is recalled at power on.
Limit lines are not recalled when the spectrum analyzer is powered on.
Key Access: System
50 MHz osc On Off turns the internal alignment signal on or off. When the internal
alignment signal is on, the RF input is disabled. Key Access: System
Alignments accesses the following Alignments menu keys which align the internal
circuitry of the spectrum analyzer, load default values for the alignment
system, turn on the frequency corrections, and adjust the 10 MHz
reference. Key Access: System
Auto Align accesses the Auto Align menu keys. Selecting All turns
on the automatic alignment of all measurement
systems. All but RF turns on the automatic alignment of
all measurement systems except the RF section.
(Eliminating automatic alignment of the RF prevents
changes in the input impedance between sweeps, which
could cause input device instability.) Off turns off
automatic alignment. When Auto Align, All, is selected,
“AA” appears along the left edge of the display. When
Auto Align, All but RF, is selected, “AB” appears.
Key Access: System, Alignments
Align Now accesses the Align Now menu keys and immediately
executes an alignment cycle of the selected system(s).
Softkey selections include All (for the alignment of all
systems), ADC, LO, IF, and RF. Key Access: System,
Alignments
Freq Correct On Off controls use of some of the correction factors. When
On is underlined, frequency correction factors are used.
When Off is underlined, frequency correction factors
are not used, and Freq Corr Off appears on the
display. Turning the correction factors off degrades
frequency accuracy.
106 Chapter 4
System (Local)
NOTE Correction factors must be on for the spectrum analyzer to meet its
specified performance.

Timebase accesses the Fine and Coarse Timebase menu keys,
which allow control of the 10 MHz timebase frequency.
This function is used to verify the settability of the
10 MHz reference and to adjust for changed operating
conditions, such as temperature. Pressing Load Defaults
or cycling power, resets the timebase to its original
value. Key Access: System, Alignments
Load Defaults loads the default values for the alignment system,
turns on the frequency corrections, and resets the
timebase to the factory values. Align Now, All, must be
selected after pressing Load Defaults.
NOTE For full alignment to be restored after loading defaults Align Now, All,
must be run 5 times, or the instrument must be in Auto Align mode for 1
hour.
Show System displays the number and description of the options

installed in your spectrum analyzer. It also displays the
instrument model number, product number, serial
number, and firmware revision number.
Key Access: System
Default Config resets the spectrum analyzer to the user configuration

originally set at the factory. It also performs an
instrument preset (see Preset in this chapter). The
following table shows the default user-configuration
settings which result from pressing Default Config.
Key Access: System, More
Configuration Default Value
Analyzer address (Option A4H) 18
Baud rate (Option 1AX) 9600
Date mode Month-day-year format
External preamp 0 dB
Internal lock Off
Power on IP
Print softkeys On
Chapter 4 107
System (Local)
Configuration Default Value
Printer address (Option A4H) 1
Printer port (Options A4H and 1AX) Parallel

Time/Date display On
Service accesses the Service menu keys which require a

password. For information, refer to the Troubleshooting
chapter in the HP ESA-L1500A Spectrum Analyzer
Service Guide. Key Access: System, More
Printer
Printer Option A4H (HP-IB and Parallel) or 1AX (RS-232 and Parallel) only.
Accesses the Printer menu keys which allow you to select from a list of
common printers, define a printer, select a printing port, and select
printer options. Key Access: System
Select Printer accesses a list of printer types from which you can
choose, and also accesses keys that allow you to define a
printer, if yours is not listed. To define a printer, press
User Defined, Define Printer to select five different
definition attributes. Resolution is input using the
keypad. The allowable range is from 75 to 2600 dots per
inch. Top Margin and Bottom Margin allow you to adjust
the white space above or below your print by entering a
number using the numeric keypad. The allowable range
is from 0 to four inches. Choose HP Color Mode to
emulate the color drivers in an HP PaintJet printer
(PJ), an HP DeskJet printer (DJ), or Off for single-color
printers. Choose Expand On to expand the printed
image by 3X, or choose Expand Off to print the image at
100%. Key Access: System, Printer
Port (Option A4H or 1AX only) accesses a menu which
allows you to select a printer port. The Printer Addr key
appears in this menu only when HP-IB is selected. Baud
Rate appears in this menu only when Serial is selected.
Key Access: System, Printer
HP-IB
selects the HP-IB interface as the printer port.

Key Access: System, Printer, Port
108 Chapter 4
System (Local)
Serial
selects the serial interface as the printer port.

Parallel
selects the parallel interface as the printer port.

Printer Addr
(Option A4H only) allows you to change the HP-IB

address of the printer. Printer Addr appears in the
printer port menu only if HP-IB is selected.
Baud Rate
(Option 1AX only) sets the data transmission speed.

Baud Rate appears in the printer Port menu only when
Serial is selected. Key Access: System, Printer, Port
Color Printing On Off allows you to select between color or black and
white printing. Key Access: System, Printer
Print Softkeys On Off allows you to print the menu key labels on the
spectrum analyzer display printout when On is
underlined. When Off is underlined, the analyzer
display will print, as well as the lines between the
menu keys, but the menu key labels will be blanked.
Form Feed allows you to send a form feed to the printer.
NOTE If the Form Feed key is pressed without a printer connected to the
spectrum analyzer, press Esc to regain control of the analyzer.
Chapter 4 109
Trace
Trace
Trace accesses the trace keys that allow you to store and manipulate
trace information. Each trace is comprised of a series of data points that
form a register where amplitude information is stored. The spectrum
analyzer updates the information for any active trace with each sweep.
If two traces are being written to, they are updated on alternating
sweeps.
Trace A B C selects the softkey menu used for trace A, trace B, or trace C functions.
Press Trace A B C until the letter of the desired trace is underlined.
Key Access: Trace
CAUTION When using normalization, the mode of traces B and C should not be
changed.
Clear Write A erases any data previously stored in trace A and continuously displays
any signals during the sweep of the spectrum analyzer. This function is
activated at power-on and by pressing Preset.
Changing the trace mode of trace C to clear write or minimum hold can
change the trace mode of trace A. If trace A is in clear-write mode or
maximum-hold mode when trace C is changed to clear write or
minimum hold, the trace mode of trace A is changed to store blank.
The following table shows the trace mode of trace A before and after
changing trace C to clear-write or minimum-hold trace mode.
Trace Mode of Trace A Trace Mode of Trace A

Before After
Clear write Blank
Maximum hold Blank
View View
Changing the trace mode of trace A to clear write or maximum hold can
change the trace mode of trace C. If trace C is in clear-write mode when
trace A is changed to clear write or minimum hold, the trace mode of
trace C is changed to minimum hold.
110 Chapter 4
Trace
Trace Mode of Trace C Trace Mode of Trace C

Before After
Clear write Minimum hold
Minimum hold Minimum hold
View View
Key Access: Trace
Clear Write B erases any data previously stored in trace B and continuously displays
any signals detected during the sweep of the spectrum analyzer.
change the trace mode of trace B. If trace B is in clear-write mode or
maximum-hold mode when trace C is changed to clear write or
minimum hold, the trace mode of trace B is changed to store blank.
The following table shows the trace mode of trace B before and after
changing trace C to clear-write or minimum-hold trace mode.
Trace Mode of Trace B Trace Mode of Trace B

Before After
Clear write Blank
Maximum hold Blank
View View
Changing the trace mode of trace B to clear write or maximum hold can
change the trace mode of trace C. If trace C is in clear-write mode when
trace B is changed to clear write or minimum hold, the trace mode of
trace C is changed to minimum hold.
Trace Mode of Trace C Trace Mode of Trace C

Before After
Clear write Minimum hold
Minimum hold Minimum hold
View View
Key Access: Trace
Chapter 4 111
Trace
Clear Write C erases any data previously stored in trace C and continuously displays
any signals detected during the sweep of the spectrum analyzer.
change the trace mode of trace A and trace B. If trace A or trace B is in
clear-write mode or maximum-hold mode when trace C is changed to
clear write or minimum hold, the trace mode of trace A or trace B is
changed to store blank. The following table shows the trace mode of
trace A or trace B before and after changing trace C to clear-write or
minimum-hold trace mode.
Trace Mode of Trace A or Trace Mode of Trace A or

B Before B After
Clear write Blank
Maximum hold Blank
View View
If you want to use trace A or trace B in the clear-write or

maximum-hold mode and do not want trace C to blank it, use
minimum-hold or view-trace mode for trace C. Key Access: Trace
Max Hold A or B maintains the maximum level for each trace point of the selected trace
(A or B), and updates each trace point if a new maximum level is
detected in successive sweeps. Key Access: Trace
Min Hold C maintains the minimum level for each trace point of trace C, and
updates each trace point if a new minimum level is detected in
successive sweeps. Key Access: Trace
View A, B, or C holds and displays the amplitude data of the selected trace. The trace
register is not updated as the spectrum analyzer sweeps. If trace A is
deactivated by pressing Blank A, the stored data can be retrieved by
pressing View A. Key Access: Trace
Blank A, B, or C stores the amplitude data for the selected trace, and removes it from
the display. The selected trace register will not be updated as the
spectrum analyzer sweeps. Key Access: Trace
112 Chapter 4
Trace
Operations accesses the following Operations menu keys:

A↔B exchanges the contents of the trace A register with the
trace B register and puts trace A in view mode. Key
Access: Trace, Operations
B - DL → B subtracts the display line from trace B and places the
result in trace B. The B - DL → B function is a math
operation. Key Access: Trace, Operations
B↔C exchanges the contents of trace B with trace C and puts
trace B in view mode. Key Access: Trace, Operations
A→C copies trace A into trace C. Key Access: Trace,
Operations
B→C copies trace B into trace C. Key Access: Trace,

Operations
Normalize accesses the following Normalize menu keys:

Normalize On Off copies trace A into trace B, subtracts trace B from
trace A and adds the result to the normalized reference
level. The result is displayed in trace A. The trace data
is normalized with respect to the normalized reference
level, even if the value of the normalized reference level
is changed. This function remains in effect on all
subsequent sweeps until it is turned off. A minus sign
(-) appears between the trace A status and the trace B
status in the display annotation while the function is
active. To turn off the normalize function, press
Normalize On Off so that Off is underlined.
CAUTION When using normalization, the mode of traces B and C should not be
changed.
CAUTION Trace A should be in clear write mode prior to setting normalize to on.
The normalize function is most useful for applying

correction data to a trace while making a stimulus
response measurement with a tracking generator. For
example, connect the cables and a thru line, in place of
the device to be measured, between a tracking
generator and the spectrum analyzer input. Notice that
the frequency response is not perfectly flat, showing the
response of the cables, as well as the flatness of both
the tracking generator and the spectrum analyzer.
Turn Normalize On. Notice that the displayed trace is
now flat, or normalized. The position of the normalized
trace can now be moved to a different position on the
display by changing the normalized reference position.
This may be useful if the device to be tested has
Chapter 4 113
Trace
positive gain, such as an amplifier. Now replace the

thru line with the device under test, and an accurate
measurement of the gain or loss can be made.
Key Access: Trace, Normalize
Norm Ref Lvl sets the level (in dB) of the normalized reference.
Key Access: Trace, Normalize
Norm Ref Posn offsets the displayed trace without affecting the
instrument gain or attenuation settings. This allows
the displayed trace to be moved without decreasing
measurement accuracy. The normalized reference
position is indicated with a (>) character on the left side
of the display and a (<) character on the right side of
the display. Key Access: Trace, Normalize
114 Chapter 4
Trig
Trig
The Trig key accesses the menu of keys that allow you to select the
sweep mode and trigger mode of the spectrum analyzer.
Free Run activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start as
soon as possible after the last sweep. Key Access: Trig
Video activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start if the
detected RF envelope voltage rises to a level set by the display line.
When Video is pressed, the display line appears on the display. The
spectrum analyzer triggers when the input signal exceeds the display
line level at the left edge of the display. Key Access: Trig
Line activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to be
synchronized with the next cycle of the line voltage. Key Access: Trig
External activates the trigger condition that allows the next sweep to start when
positive- going external voltage (connected to Ext Trig In on the rear
panel) passes through approximately 1.5 volts. The external trigger
signal must be a 0 V to +5 V TTL signal. Key Access: Trig
Chapter 4 115
Trig
116 Chapter 4
5 Menu Maps
117
Menu Maps
118 Chapter 5
Menu Maps
Chapter 5 119
Menu Maps
120 Chapter 5
Menu Maps
Chapter 5 121
Menu Maps
a. New Filename appears in the menu only when Internal Lock On Off is
Off.
b. Save Now is replaced with (Locked) when Internal Lock On Off is On.
c. Delete Now is replaced with (Locked) when Internal Lock On Off is On.
122 Chapter 5
Menu Maps
Chapter 5 123
Menu Maps
124 Chapter 5
Menu Maps
a. The marker number corresponds to the number of the marker

selected with the Select Marker 1 2 3 4 key.
Chapter 5 125
Menu Maps
a. Frequency is replaced with Time when the X Axis Units Freq Time
selection is Time.
126 Chapter 5
Menu Maps
Chapter 5 127
Menu Maps
128 Chapter 5
Menu Maps
Chapter 5 129
Menu Maps
130 Chapter 5
Menu Maps
a. With Option A4H installed, Remote Port HP-IB appears. With Option
1AX installed, Remote Port Serial appears. When neither the A4H or
1AX options are installed, this key is blank.
b. Access to the Service menu requires a password.
Chapter 5 131
Menu Maps
a. Option A4H (HP-IB and Parallel interface) only.

b. Option 1AX (RS-232 and Parallel interface) only.
c. Option A4H or 1AX only.
d. Option A4H only. Printer Addr appears in the menu only when HP-IB
is selected.
e. Option 1AX only. Baud Rate appears in the menu only when Serial is
selected.
f. Select Printer accesses menus listing a selection of printers. It also
accesses a User Defined key, which allows you to configure a printer
which is not listed.
g. Define Printer appears in the menu only when User Defined is
selected.
132 Chapter 5
Menu Maps
a. The trace letter corresponds to the trace selected with the Trace A B
C key.
b. When Trace C is selected with the Trace A B C key, Min Hold C

appears.
Chapter 5 133
Menu Maps
134 Chapter 5
6 Options and Accessories
135
Options and Accessories
Options
Options
Options can be ordered by option number when you order your
spectrum analyzer. Some of the options are also available as kits that
can be ordered and installed after you have received your spectrum
analyzer.
Operating and Carrying Case (Option AYT and

Option AYU)
Option AYT (gray) and Option AYU (yellow) are protective soft
operating and carrying cases. The case are made with rip-stop nylon.
An outside pocket holds manuals or other accessories. A reinforced
adjustable padded shoulder strap provides ergonomic distribution
between the hand and shoulder. The front and rear panel soft covers
adjust to be compatible with the front panel protective hard cover
(Option UK9) and snap on battery pack (HP E1779A). Side ventilation
allows for operation without removal, but the maximum operating
temperature is reduced by 10 °C to 45 °C.
For Option AYT, order E4411A AYT. For Option AYU, order E4411A
AYU.
Option AYT and AYU are also available after the purchase of your
spectrum analyzer. Order E4411AU AYT or E4411AU AYU.
Transit Case (Option AXT)

Option AXT adds a hard transit case. The hard transit case will survive
commercial transportation. This rugged case has two wheels and an
extendible handle for easy transport. The case can also accommodate
two battery packs and ac adapters.
For Option AXT, order E4411A AXT.
Option AXT is also available after the purchase of your spectrum
analyzer. Order E4411AU AXT.
12 Vdc Power Cable (Option A5D)

Option A5D provides a 12 Vdc power cable that allows your spectrum
analyzer to be powered from automotive or truck 12 V batteries. Option
A5D requires spectrum analyzers with serial prefix of US3745 or
greater. Analyzers with serial numbers prior to US3745 must order
E4411AU Option R12 upgrade kit.
136 Chapter 6
Options
75 Ω Input Impedance (Option 1DP)

This option provides a 75 Ω input impedance instead of the standard
50 Ω impedance. Spectrum analyzers with this option use cables, circuit
boards, and front panels that are different from the standard units.
For Option 1DP, order E4411A 1DP.
Option 1DP is not retrofittable.
Tracking Generator (Option 1DN and

Option 1DQ)
Option 1DN (9 kHz to 1.5 GHz) and Option 1DQ (1 MHz to 1.5 GHz)
provide a built-in tracking generator. This source-receiver combination
makes insertion-loss, frequency response, and return-loss
measurements. The tracking generator has a wide distortion-free
dynamic range, plus good sensitivity and selectivity.
Option 1DN has the standard 50 Ω output impedance. Option 1DQ has
a 75 Ω output impedance, and is available only with Option 1DP.
For Option 1DN, order E4411A 1DN. For Option 1DQ, order E4411A
1DQ.
Options 1DN and 1DQ are also available as retrofit kits after the
purchase of your spectrum analyzer. Order E4411AU 1DN or E4411AU
1DQ.
IF, Sweep, and Video Inputs and Outputs

(Option A4J)
Option A4J provides the spectrum analyzer with inputs and outputs
typically found on most spectrum analyzers. They are as follows: SWP
OUT, HI SWP OUT (TTL), HI SWP IN (TTL), AUX VIDEO OUT, and
AUX IF OUT.
See “Rear Panel Features” in Chapter 2 for more information.
For Option A4J, order E4411A A4J.
Option A4J is also available as a retrofit kit after the purchase of your
spectrum analyzer. Order E4411AU A4J.
Chapter 6 137
Options
HP-IB and Parallel Interface (Option A4H)

Option A4H allows you to control your spectrum analyzer from a
computer that uses a Hewlett-Packard interface bus (HP-IB). Option
A4H includes an HP-IB connector, a parallel interface connector for
printers, and the HP ESA-L1500A Spectrum Analyzer Programmer’s
Guide.
Option A4H allows the spectrum analyzer to copy its display to a
printer.
For Option A4H, order E4411A A4H.
Option A4H is also available as a retrofit kit after the purchase of your
spectrum analyzer. Order E4411AU A4H.
RS-232 and Parallel Interface (Option 1AX)

Option 1AX allows you to control your spectrum analyzer from a
computer that uses an RS-232 interface. It includes an RS-232 9-pin
connector, a parallel interface connector for printers, and the HP
ESA-L1500A Spectrum Analyzer Programmer’s Guide.
Option 1AX allows the spectrum analyzer to copy its display to a
printer.
For Option 1AX, order E4411A 1AX.
Option 1AX is also available as a retrofit kit after the purchase of your
spectrum analyzer. Order E4411AU 1AX.
Front Panel Protective Cover (Option UK9)

The impact cover assembly snaps onto the front of your spectrum
analyzer to protect the front panel during travel and when the unit is
not in use.
For Option UK9, order E4411A UK9.
Option UK9 is also available as a retrofit kit after the purchase of your
spectrum analyzer. Order E4411AU UK9.
50 Ω to 75 Ω Matching Pad (Option 1D7)

This option provides a 50 Ω to 75 Ω matching pad with dc block to be
used on the spectrum analyzer input. The pad has a frequency range of
9 MHz to 2 GHz. It adapts your standard 50 Ω spectrum analyzer to be
compatible with a 75 Ω system under test. Connector types are 50 Ω N
(m) to 75 Ω BNC (f).
For Option 1D7, order E4411A 1D7.
Option 1D7 can be ordered as E4411AU 1D7 after the purchase of your
spectrum analyzer.
138 Chapter 6
Options
Rack Mount Kit With Handles (Option 1CP)

Option 1CP provides the parts necessary to mount the spectrum
analyzer in an HP System II cabinet or in a standard 19 inch (482.6
mm) equipment rack. It includes front handles and rack slides for
added convenience.
For Option 1CP, order E4411A 1CP.
Option 1CP is also available as a retrofit kit after the purchase of your
spectrum analyzer. Order E4411AU 1CP.
User’s Guide and Calibration Guide (Option 0B1)

Option 0B1 provides an additional copy of the HP ESA-L1500A
Spectrum Analyzer User’s and Calibration Guide, HP ESA-L1500A
Spectrum Analyzer Measurement Guide, HP ESA-L1500A Spectrum
Analyzer Programmer’s Guide, and the HP ESA-L1500A Self-Guided
Demo.
For Option 0B1, order E4411A 0B1.
To order Option 0B1 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer,
order E4411AU 0B1.
Service Documentation (Option 0BX)

Option 0BX provides one copy of the assembly-level repair service guide
and one copy of the component-level information packets. The
assembly-level repair service guide describes assembly level
troubleshooting procedures and adjustment procedures. The
component-level information includes parts lists, component-location
diagrams, and schematic diagrams for selected repairable assemblies.
The manuals can be ordered separately.
For Option 0BX, order E4411A 0BX.
To order Option 0BX after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer,
order E4411AU 0BX.
Commercial Calibration with Test Data

(Option UK6)
Option UK6 provides a commercial calibration certificate and the
calibration test data with the spectrum analyzer, order E4411A UK6.
Chapter 6 139
Options
Benchlink Spectrum Analyzer Screen Capture

Software (Option B70)
Option B70 provides the ability to perform screen captures of the
E4411A displays onto a PC. It also allows transfer of files between the
analyzer and a PC.
For Option B70, order E4411A B70.
To order Option B70 after the purchase of your spectrum analyzer,
order E4444A.
140 Chapter 6
Accessories
Accessories
A number of accessories are available from Hewlett-Packard to help you
configure your spectrum analyzer for your specific applications. They
can be ordered through your local HP sales and service office.
RF and Transient Limiters

The HP 11867A and HP 11693A RF limiters protect the spectrum
analyzer input circuits from damage due to high power levels. The
HP 11867A operates over a frequency range of dc to 1800 MHz and
begins reflecting signal levels over 1 mW up to 10 W average power and
100 watts peak power. The HP 11693A microwave limiter (0.1 to 12.4
GHz, usable to 18 GHz) guards against input signals over 1 milliwatt
up to 1 watt average power and 10 watts peak power.
The 11947A transient limiter protects the spectrum analyzer input
circuits from damage due to signal transients. It specifically is needed
for use with a line impedance stabilization network (LISN). It operates
over a frequency range of 9 kHz to 200 MHz, with 10 dB of insertion
loss.
50 Ω/75 Ω Minimum Loss Pad

The HP 11852B is a low VSWR minimum loss pad that is required for
measurements on 75 Ω devices using an spectrum analyzer with a 50 Ω
input. It is effective over a frequency range of dc to 2 GHz.
75 Ω Matching Transformer
The HP 11694A allows you to make measurements in 75 Ω systems
using a spectrum analyzer with a 50 Ω input. It is effective over a
frequency range of 3 to 500 MHz.
RF Bridges
The HP 86205A 50 Ω RF bridge and HP 86207A 75 Ω RF bridge can be
used to make reflection measurements with the spectrum analyzer with
tracking generator Options 1DN or 1DQ. These external directional
bridges offer high directivity and excellent port match. The HP 86205A
operates over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 6 GHz. The HP 86207A
operates over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz.
Chapter 6 141
Accessories
AC Power Source
The HP 85901A provides 200 watts of continuous power for field and
mobile application. The self-contained ac power source has outputs for
either 115 V or 230 V and runs on its own internal battery, an external
battery, or on another 12 Vdc source. Typical operating time exceeds
1 hour for 100 watt continuous use at room temperature.
Snap on Rechargeable Battery

The HP E1779A is a rechargeable dc power sources that snaps on to the
rear of your spectrum analyzer to provide freedom from ac power
mains. Each battery will allow you cordless operation of your
ESA-L1500A for up to 1.9 hours prior to recharging. The HP E1779A
recharges in just 6 hours at 25 °C using the supplied ac adapter. Snap
on design makes it quick and easy to convert the analyzer to dc
operation or swap battery packs.
E1779A requires spectrum analyzers with serial prefix of US3745 or
greater. Analyzers with serial numbers prior to US3745 must order
E4411AU Option R12 upgrade kit.
AC Probe
The HP 85024A high frequency probe performs in-circuit
measurements without adversely loading the circuit under test. The
probe has an input capacitance of 0.7 pF shunted by 1 MΩ of resistance
and operates over a frequency range of 300 kHz to 3 GHz. High probe
sensitivity and low distortion levels allow measurements to be made
while taking advantage of the full dynamic range of the spectrum
analyzer.
The HP 41800A low frequency probe has a low input capacitance and a
frequency range of 5 Hz to 500 MHz.
Broadband Preamplifiers and Power Amplifiers

Preamplifiers and power amplifiers can be used with your spectrum
analyzer to enhance measurements of very low-level signals.
• The HP 10855A preamplifier provides a minimum of 22 dB gain
from 2 MHz to 1300 MHz. (Power is supplied by the spectrum
analyzer’s probe power output.)
• The HP 8447D preamplifier provides a minimum of 25 dB gain from
100 kHz to 1.3 GHz.
• The HP 87405A preamplifier provides a minimum of 22 dB gain
from 10 MHz to 3 GHz. (Power is supplied by the spectrum
analyzer’s probe power output.)
142 Chapter 6
Accessories
• The HP 85905A CATV 75 ohm preamplifier provides a minimum of

18 dB gain from 45 MHz to 1 GHz. (Power is supplied by the
spectrum analyzer’s probe power output.)
Carrying Strap (HP part number E4411-60028)

The carrying strap is a reinforced, adjustable, padded shoulder strap
providing ergonomic weight distribution between the hand and the
shoulder.
External Keyboard
The HP C1405B keyboard is an IBM AT compatible keyboard that can
be connected to the external keyboard connector on the front panel of
the spectrum analyzer. Any IBM AT compatible keyboard with a mini
DIN connector will work. Screen titles and remote programming
commands can be entered easily with the external keyboard.
HP-IB Cable
For use with Option A4H. The HP 10833 HP-IB cables interconnect
HP-IB devices and are available in four different lengths. HP-IB cables
are used to connect printers and controllers to a spectrum analyzer.
Parallel Interface Cable

For use with Option A4H and 1AX The HP 92284A parallel interface
cable is a 36-pin to 25-pin male-to-male 2 meter cable used to connect
supported printers to a spectrum analyzer.
Printer
For use with Option A4H or 1AX. The DeskJet personal printers provide
black and white or color printing for another form of permanent records
of your test results. The HP LaserJet series printers are also
compatible. The printers connect to the parallel interface installed on
the spectrum analyzer with either Option A4H or 1AX.
RS-232 Cable
For use with Option 1AX. The HP 24542G is a 3 meter 9-pin (f) to
25-pin (m) RS-232 cable. The HP 24542G cable can be used with
HP DeskJet printers, HP LaserJet Series, and PCs with 25-pin (f)
RS-232 connectors. The HP 24542U is a 3 meter 9-pin (f) to 9-pin (f)
RS-232 cable for serial 9-pin PC connection to an analyzer. The
LaserJet 4P and 4Plus require an HP C2932A 9-pin (m) to 9-pin (f)
cable for RS-232 connection. The modem cable required is HP 24542M
9-pin (f) to 25-pin (m), and the PC cable is HP 24542U.
Chapter 6 143
Accessories
144 Chapter 6
7 Specifications
145
Specifications
About This Chapter
About This Chapter

This chapter contains specifications and characteristics for the HP
ESA-L1500A spectrum analyzer. The distinction between specifications
and characteristics is described as follows.
• Specifications describe the performance of parameters covered by
the product warranty. (The temperature range is 0 °C to + 55 °C,
unless otherwise noted.)
• Characteristics describe product performance that is useful in the
application of the product, but is not covered by the product
warranty.
• Typical performance describes additional product performance
information that is not covered by the product warranty. It is
performance beyond an indicated specification, that most units will
exhibit.
• Nominal values indicate the expected, but not warranted, value of a
parameter.
The following conditions must be met for the analyzer to meet its
specifications.
❏ The analyzer is within the one year calibration cycle.
❏ If Auto Align All is selected, the analyzer will meet its specifications:
• After 2 hours of storage within the operating temperature range,
• 5 minutes after the analyzer is turned on.
❏ If Auto Align Off is selected, the analyzer will meet its specifications:
• When the analyzer is at a constant temperature, within the
operating temperature range, for a minimum of 2 hours,
• After the analyzer is turned on for a minimum of 90 minutes, and
Align Now All has been run,
• When Align Now All is run every hour (or if the ambient
temperature changes more than 5 °C).
146 Chapter 7
Specifications
Frequency
Frequency
Specifications Supplemental Information
Frequency Range
50 Ω 9 kHz to 1.5 GHz
75 Ω (Option 1DP) 1 MHz to 1.5 GHz
Frequency Reference
Aging ±2 × 10-6/year ±1.0 × 10-7/day, characteristic
Settability ±0.5 × 10-6
Temperature Stability ±5 × 10-6
Frequency Readout
Accuracy
(Start, Stop, Center, Marker) ±(frequency readout ×

frequency reference errora +
span accuracy + 20% of RBW)
a. Frequency reference error = (aging rate × period of time since adjustment + settability +
temperature stability).
Chapter 7 147
Specifications
Frequency
Marker Frequency
Counter
Resolution Selectable from 1 Hz to

100 kHz
Accuracy a ±(marker frequency ×

frequency reference errorb +
counter resolution)
a. Marker level to displayed noise level > 25 dB, Span ≤ 1.5 GHz, RBW/Span 0.002. “Marker
Count Widen Res BW” annotation is displayed when RBW/Span < 0.002.
b. Frequency reference error = (aging rate × period of time since adjustment + settability +
Frequency Span
Range 0 Hz (zero span), 100 Hz to

1.5 GHz
Resolution Four digits or 2 Hz, whichever

is greater
Accuracy ±1% of span
Sweep Time
Range 5 ms to 2000 s 50 ms is the minimum sweep

time with the built-in tracking
Accuracy generator.
5 ms to 2000 s ±1%
Sweep Trigger Free Run, Single, Line, Video,

External
148 Chapter 7
Specifications
Frequency
Resolution Bandwidth
Range (−3 dB width) 1 kHz to 3 MHz, in 1-3-10 5 MHz, characteristic

sequence
Accuracy (1 kHz to 3 MHz ±20%

RBW)
Shape (1 kHz to 3 MHz RBW) Synchronously tuned four

poles, approximately
Gaussian shape
Selectivity (60 dB/3 dB

Bandwidth Ratio)
1 kHz to 3 MHz RBW <15:1
Video Bandwidth
(−3 dB)
Range 30 Hz to 1 MHz in 1-3-10 3 MHz, characteristic

sequence
Accuracy ±30%, characteristic
Shape Post detection, single pole low-

pass filter used to average
displayed noise
Stability
Noise Sidebands, offset from

CW signal with 1 kHz RBW,
30 Hz VBW and sample
detector
≥10 kHz ≤ −90 dBc/Hz
≥20 kHz ≤ −98 dBc/Hz
≥30 kHz ≤ −102 dBc/Hz
≥100 kHz ≤ −112 dBc/Hz
Chapter 7 149
Specifications
Frequency
Residual FM
1 kHz RBW, 1 kHz VBW ≤150 Hz pk-pk in 100 ms
System-Related Sidebands,
offset from CW signal
≥30 kHz ≤−65 dBc
150 Chapter 7
Specifications
Amplitude
Amplitude
Amplitude specifications do not apply for the negative peak detector
mode.
Measurement Range
50 Ω −120 dBm to +30 dBm
75 Ω (Option 1DP) −65 dBmV to +72 dBmV
Input Attenuator Range 0 to 60 dB, in 5 dB steps
Maximum Safe Input Level
Input attenuator setting

≥15 dB
Average Continuous Power
50 Ω +30 dBm (1 W) Signals > +33 dBm (2 W)

nominal may trigger input
protection, which disconnects
the input path.
75 Ω (Option 1DP) +72 dBmV (0.2 W) Signals > +79 dBmV (1 W)

Peak Pulse Power protection, which disconnects
the input path.
50 Ω +30 dBm (1 W)
75 Ω (Option 1DP) +72 dBmV (0.2 W)
dc 100 Vdc dc transients may

momentarily trigger input
protection
Chapter 7 151
Specifications
Amplitude
Input attenuator setting

<15 dB
Average Continuous Power
50 Ω +3 dBm (2 mW) Signals > +6 dBm (4 mW)

protection, which
automatically increases input
attenuation to 15 dB
75 Ω (Option 1DP) +58 dBmV (10 mW) Signals > +61 dBmV (15 mW)
Peak Pulse Power protection, which
50 Ω +3 dBm (2 mW) automatically increases input
attenuation to 15 dB.
75 Ω (Option 1DP) +58 dBmV (10 mW)
dc 100 Vdc dc transients may trigger

input protection
1 dB Gain Compression
Total power at input mixer a,b

50 Ω 0 dBm
75 Ω (Option 1DP) +46.75 dBmV
a. Mixer Power Level (dBm) = Input Power (dBm) − Input Attenuation (dB)
b. For resolution bandwidths ≤30 kHz, the maximum input signal amplitude must be
≤ reference level +10 dB. (Option 1DP: For resolution bandwidths ≤30 kHz, the maximum
input signal amplitude must be ≤ reference level +5 dB).
152 Chapter 7
Specifications
Amplitude
Displayed Average Noise

Level
(Input terminated, 0 dB
attenuation, −70 dBm a
reference level, 30 Hz VBW,
sample detector, 1 kHz RBW)
50 Ω
400 kHz to 10 MHz ≤ −115 dBm
10 MHz to 500 MHz ≤ −120 dBm
500 MHz to 1.2 GHz ≤ −116 dBm
1.2 GHz to 1.5 GHz ≤ −113 dBm
75 Ω, (Option 1DP)
1 MHz to 10 MHz ≤ −63 dBmV
10 MHz to 500 MHz ≤ −65 dBmV
500 MHz to 1 GHz ≤ −60 dBmV
1 GHz to 1.5 GHz ≤ −53 dBmV

a. 75 Ω Option 1DP: Use reference level −21.24 dBmV.
Display Range
Log Scale 0 to −85 dB from reference

level is calibrated; 0.1, 0.2, 0.5
dB/division and 1 to 20
dB/division in 1 dB steps; ten
divisions displayed.
Linear Scale Ten divisions
Scale Units dBm, dBmV, dBµV, V, and W
Chapter 7 153
Specifications
Amplitude
Marker Readout
Resolution
Log scale
0 to −5 dB from ref level 0.1 dB
−5 to −65 dB from ref level 0.05 dB
Linear scale 0.05% of reference level
Frequency Response
50 Ω, Relative to 50 MHz
9 kHz to 1.5 GHz
10 dB attenuation
20 to 30 °C ±0.75 dB
0 to 55 °C ±1.0 dB
0, 5, 15 to 60 dB ±1.0 dB, characteristic

attenuation
Relative to 50 MHz
1 MHz to 1.5 GHz
10 dB attenuation
20 to 30 °C ±0.75 dB
0 to 55 °C ±1.0 dB
0, 5, 15 to 50 dB ±1.0 dB, characteristic

attenuation
55 to 60 dB attenuation,
1 MHz to 1 GHz ±1.0 dB, characteristic
1 GHz to 1.5 GHz ±1.2 dB, characteristic
154 Chapter 7
Specifications
Amplitude
Input Attenuation
Switching Uncertainty at
50 MHz
Attenuator Setting
0 dB to 5 dB ±0.3 dB
10 dB Reference
15 dB ±0.3 dB
20 to 60 dB ±(0.1 dB + 0.01 × Attenuator

Setting)
Absolute Amplitude
Accuracy
At reference settingsa ±0.3 dB
a. Settings are: Reference Level −25 dBm (+26.76 dBmV for 75 Ω); Input Attenuation 10 dB;
Center Frequency 50 MHz; Res BW 3 kHz; Video BW 10 kHz; Scale Linear; Span 2 kHz;
sweep time coupled, sample detector, signal at reference level.
RF Input VSWR
Attenuator setting
50 Ω
0 to 5 dB 1.55:1, characteristic
75 Ω (Option 1DP)
1 MHz to 1 GHz
1 GHz to 1.5 GHz
Chapter 7 155
Specifications
Amplitude
Input protection is tripped Open input, characteristic
Internal 50 MHz osc is on Open input, characteristic
Auto Align All is selected Open input momentarily

during retrace, characteristic
Auto Alignmenta
Sweep-to-sweep variation ±0.1 dB

a. Set Auto Align to Off and use Align Now All to eliminate this variation.
Switching Uncertainty
(at reference level)
3 kHz RBW Reference
1 kHz, 10 kHz to 3 MHz RBW ±0.4 dB
Reference Level
Range Adjustable over Amplitude

Measurement Range
Resolution
Log Scale ±0.01 dB
Linear Scale ±0.12% of reference level
Accuracy, 50 Ω
(at a fixed frequency, a fixed
attenuation, and referenced to
−35 dBm + atten setting)
≥−70 dBm + atten setting ±(0.3 dB + 0.01 × absa (ref

level − atten setting
+35 dBm))
156 Chapter 7
Specifications
Amplitude
<−70 dBm + atten setting ±(0.6 dB + 0.01 × absa (ref

level − atten setting
+35 dBm))
Accuracy, 75 Ω
(at a fixed frequency, a fixed
attenuation, and referenced to
+ 16.76 dBmV + atten setting)
≥−21.24 dBmVb + atten ±(0.3 dB + 0.01 × absa (ref

setting level − atten setting
−16.76 dBmV))
<−21.24 dBmVb + atten ±(0.6 dB + 0.01 × absa (ref

setting level − atten setting
−16.76 dBmV))
a. abs=Absolute value
b. –11.24 dBmV if frequency is > 1 GHz and resolution bandwidth is 30 kHz.
Display Scale Switching

Uncertainty
Linear to Log Switching ±0.25 dB at reference level
Log Scale Switching No error
Display Scale Fidelity
Log Maximum Cumulative
0 to −85 dB from ±(0.3 dB + 0.01 × dB from

Reference Level reference level)
Log Incremental Accuracy
0 to −70 dB from ±0.4 dB/4 dB

Reference Level
Linear Accuracy ±3% of reference level
Chapter 7 157
Specifications
Amplitude
Spurious Responses
50 Ω
Second Harmonic Distortion
2 MHz to 1.5 GHz < −75 dBc for −40 dBm signal +35 dBm SHI (second
at input mixer.a harmonic intercept)
Third Order
Intermodulation Distortion
2 MHz to 5 MHz +5 dBm, characteristic TOI

(third order intercept)
5 MHz to 1.5 GHz < −74 dBc for two −30 dBm +7 dBm TOI
signals at input mixera and
>50 kHz separation.
Other Input Related

Spurious
30 kHz ≤ offset < −65 dBc, for −20 dBm signal

≤1200 MHz at input mixera ≤1.5 GHz.
Offset >1200 MHz < −45 dBc, for −20 dBm signal
at input mixera ≤1.5 GHz.
Noise Floor Degradation
Input frequency = < −62 dBc, for −45 dBm signal

1210.7 MHz ± RBW at input mixera
Spurious Responses
75 Ω
Second Harmonic Distortion
2 MHz to 1.5 GHz < −75 dBc for +14 dBmV +89 dBmV SHI (second
signal at input mixer.a harmonic intercept)
158 Chapter 7
Specifications
Amplitude
Third Order
Intermodulation Distortion
2 MHz to 5 MHz +57.76 dBmV, characteristic

TOI (third order intercept)
5 MHz to 900 MHz < −74 dBc for two +59.46 dBmV TOI
+22.46 dBmV signals at input
mixera and >50 kHz
separation.
900 MHz to 1.5 GHz < −74 dBc for two +57.76 dBmV, characteristic
+20.76 dBmV signals at input TOI (third order intercept)
mixera and >50 kHz
separation.
Other Input Related

Spurious
30 kHz ≤ offset < −65 dBc, for +34 dBmV

≤1200 MHz signal at input mixera
≤1.5 GHz.
Offset >1200 MHz < −45 dBc, for +34 dBmV

signal at input mixera
≤1.5 GHz.
Noise Floor Degradation
Input frequency = < −62 dBc, for +9 dBmV signal

1210.7 MHz ± RBW at input mixera
Residual Responses (Input

terminated and 0 dB
attenuation)
50 Ω
150 kHz to 1.5 GHz < −90 dBm
1 MHz to 1.5 GHz < −36 dBmV
Chapter 7 159
Specifications
Amplitude
AM Demod Tune and listen to AM signals
Dynamic Range
160 Chapter 7
Specifications
Options
Options
Tracking Generator Specifications (Option 1DN

or 1DQ)
(The temperature range for tracking generator specifications is 20˚C to
30˚C.)
Output Frequency Range
50 Ω (Option 1DN) 9 kHz to 1.5 GHz
75 Ω (Option 1DQ) 1 MHz to 1.5 GHz
Residual FM
< 10 MHz ≤100 Hz peak, 20 Hz to

10 kHz BW
≥ 10 MHz ≤100 Hz peak, 20 Hz to

200 kHz BW
Output Power Level
Range
50 Ω (Option 1DN) 0 to −70 dBm
75 Ω (Option 1DQ) +42.76 to −27.24 dBmV
Resolution 0.1 dB
Absolute Accuracy (at 50 MHz

with coupled source
attenuator)
50 Ω (Option 1DN) ± 0.5 dB

Referenced to 0 dBm
75 Ω (Option 1DQ) ± 0.5 dB

Referenced to +42.76 dBmV
Chapter 7 161
Specifications
Options
Vernier
Range 10 dBa
Accuracy (with coupled

source attenuator)
50 Ω (Option 1DN) ±0.75 dB, for 0 to −10 dBm

Referenced to 0 dBm
75 Ω (Option 1DQ) ±0.75 dB, for +42.76 to

Referenced to +32.76 dBmV
42.76 dBmV
Output Attenuator Range 0 to 60 dB in 10 dB steps

a. See the Output Accuracy table.
Maximum Safe Reverse

Level
50 Ω (Option 1DN)a +20 dBm (0.1 W), 100 Vdc,

characteristic
75 Ω (Option 1DQ)a +69 dBmV (0.1 W), 100 Vdc,

characteristic
a. dc transients may trigger reverse power protection.
Output Power Sweep
Range
50 Ω (Option 1DN) (−15 dBm to 0 dBm) − (Source

Attenuator Setting)
75 Ω (Option 1DQ) (+27.76 dBmV to

+42.76 dBmV) − (Source
Attenuator Setting)
Resolution 0.1 dB
Accuracy (zero span) <1.5 dB peak-to-peak
162 Chapter 7
Specifications
Options
Maximum Power Sweep Characteristics (Option 1DN)a
Manual Attenuator Setting Allowed Source Amplitude Power Sweep Range

(Start of Power Sweep Level)
0 dB −15 dBm to 0 dBm 0 to 15 dB
10 dB −25 dBm to −10 dBm 0 to 15 dB

a. To get the maximum power sweep range, press Attenuation Auto Man (in the Source
Amptd menu) so that Man is underlined. This turns off the auto coupling so that you can
set the attenuation manually.
Maximum Power Sweep Characteristics (Option 1DQ) a
Manual Attenuator Setting Allowed Source Amplitude Power Sweep Range

(Start of Power Sweep Level)
0 dB +27.76 dBmV to +42.76 dBmV 0 to 15 dB
30 dB −2.24 dBmV to +12.76 dBmV 0 to 15 dB
40 dB −12.24 dBmV to +2.76 dBmV 0 to 15 dB
50 dB −22.24 dBmV to −7.24 dBmV 0 to 15 dB
60 dB −32.24 dBmV to −17.24 dBmV 0 to 15 dB
a. To get the maximum power sweep range, press Attenuation Auto Man (in the Source
Amptd menu) so that Man is underlined. This turns off the auto coupling so that you can
set the attenuation manually.
Chapter 7 163
Specifications
Options
Output Flatness
Referenced to 50 MHz, 0 dB
attenuator
50 Ω (Option 1DN)
9 kHz to 1.5 GHz ±2 dB
10 MHz to 1.5 GHz ±1.5 dB
75 Ω (Option 1DQ)
1 MHz to 1.5 GHz ±2 dB
10 MHz to 1.5 GHz ±1.5 dB
Spurious Outputs
50 Ω (Option 1DN)
(0 dBm output)
Harmonic Spurs
9 kHz to 20 MHz < −20 dBc
20 MHz to 1.5 GHz < −25 dBc
Non-harmonic Spurs < −35 dBc
75 Ω (Option 1DQ)
(+42.76 dBmV output)
Harmonic Spurs
1 MHz to 20 MHz < −20 dBc
20 MHz to 1.5 GHz < −25 dBc
Non-harmonic Spurs < −35 dBc
Dynamic Range a
50 Ω (Option 1DN)
400 kHz to 1 MHz ≥116 dB
1 MHz to 500 MHz ≥120 dB
500 MHz to 1.2 GHz ≥116 dB
1.2 GHz to 1.5 GHz ≥113 dB
164 Chapter 7
Specifications
Options
75 Ω (Option 1DQ)
1 MHz to 500 MHz ≥107.76 dB
500 MHz to 1 GHz ≥103.76 dB
1 GHz to 1.5 GHz ≥97.76 dB
Tracking Generator
Feedthrough b
50 Ω (Option 1DN)
400 kHz to 1 MHz ≤ −116 dBm
1 MHz to 500 MHz ≤ −120 dBm
500 MHz to 1.2 GHz ≤ −116 dBm
1.2 GHz to 1.5 GHz ≤ −113 dBm
75 Ω (Option 1DQ)
1 MHz to 500 MHz ≤−65 dBmV
500 MHz to 1 GHz ≤−61 dBmV
1 GHz to 1.5 GHz ≤−55 dBmV

a. Dynamic range is the difference between the maximum power out and, either the track-
ing generator feedthrough or the receiver’s displayed average noise level, whichever is
higher.
b. Leakage measured with maximum output power and input and output connectors termi-
nated into their characteristic impedance.
Output Tracking
Drift No error
Swept Tracking Error No error for coupled sweep

times
Chapter 7 165
Specifications
Options
RF Power-Off Residuals
50 Ω (Option 1DN) < −120 dBm, characteristic

100 kHz to 1.5 GHz
75 Ω (Option 1DQ) < −65 dBmV, characteristic

1 MHz to 1.5 GHz
Output Attenuator
Repeatability ±0.2 dB, characteristic
Output VSWR <2.5:1, characteristic
Tracking Generator Output Accuracy Characteristics, Option 1DN

(in auto-coupled mode)
Relative
Relative
Accuracy Absolute
TG Output Attenuator Accuracy Absolute
(at 50 MHz, Accuracy
Power Level Setting (referred Accuracy
referred to (at 50 MHz)
to 0 dBm)
0 dBm)
0 dBm 0 dB 0 dB (Ref) ±0.50 dB ±1.50 dB ±2.00 dB
−0.1 to −10.99 dBm 0 dB ±0.75 dB ±1.25 dB ±2.25 dB ±2.75 dB
−11 to −20.99 dBm 10 dB ±1.35 dB ±1.85 dB ±3.00 dB ±3.50 dB
−61 to −70 dBm 60 dB ±2.85 dB ±3.35 dB ±4.50 dB ±5.00 dB
166 Chapter 7
Specifications
Options
Tracking Generator Output Accuracy Characteristics, Option 1DQ

(in auto-coupled mode)
Relative
Relative
Accuracy Absolute
Accuracy
TG Output Power Attenuator (at 50 MHz, Accuracy Absolute
(referred
Level Setting referred to (at Accuracy
to +42.76
+42.76 50 MHz)
dBmV)
dBmV)
+42.76 dBmV 0 dB 0 dB (Ref) ±0.50 dB ±1.50 dB ±2.00 dB
+42.66 to 0 dB ±0.75 dB ±1.25 dB ±2.25 dB ±2.75 dB

+31.77 dBmV
+31.76 to 10 dB ±1.35 dB ±1.85 dB ±3.00 dB ±3.50 dB

+21.77 dBmV
+21.76 to 20 dB ±1.65 dB ±2.15 dB ±3.30 dB ±3.80 dB

+11.77 dBmV
+11.76 to 30 dB ±1.95 dB ±2.45 dB ±3.60 dB ±4.10 dB

+1.77 dBmV
+1.76 to 40 dB ±2.25 dB ±2.75 dB ±3.90 dB ±4.40 dB

−8.23 dBmV
−8.24 to 50 dB ±2.55 dB ±3.05 dB ±4.20 dB ±4.70 dB

−18.23 dBmV
−18.24 to 60 dB ±2.85 dB ±3.35 dB ±4.50 dB ±5.00 dB

−27.23 dBmV
Chapter 7 167
Specifications
General
General
Temperature Range
Operating a 0 °C to +55 °C
Storage −40 °C to +75 °C
a. When using a soft carrying case, Option AYT or Option AYU, the operating temperature
range is 0 °C to +45 °C.
Audible Noise
(ISO 7779)
Sound Pressure at 25 °C <33 dB, (<4.8 Bels power)
Military Specification Has been type tested to the

environmental specifications
of MIL-PRF-28800F class 3.
EMI Compatibility Conducted and radiated

emission is in compliance with
CISPR Pub. 11/1990 Group 1
Class A.
168 Chapter 7
Specifications
General
Immunity Testing
Radiated Immunity Testing was done at 3 V/m

according to IEC 801-3/1984.
When the analyzer tuned
frequency is identical to the
immunity test signal
frequency there may be
signals of up to −60 dBm
displayed on the screen.
Electrostatic Discharge Air discharges of up to 8 kV

were applied according to IEC
801-2/1991. Discharges to
center pins of any of the
connectors may cause damage
to the associated circuitry.
Power Requirements
AC Operation
Voltage 90 to 250 V rms
Frequency 47 to 440 Hz
Power Consumption, On <200 W
Power Consumption, <5 W

Standby
DC Operation
Serial prefix <US3745
Voltage 15 to 20 Vdc
Power Consumption <175 W
Serial prefix ≥US3745
Voltage, turn-on 12 to 22 Vdc For initial voltage ≥16 Vdc,

turn-off voltage = 16 Vdc.
For initial voltage <16 Vdc,
turn-off voltage = 11.5 Vdc.
Power Consumption, On <175 W
Power Consumption, <1 W

Standby
Chapter 7 169
Specifications
General
Weight (without options)
Net 12.3 kg (27 lb), characteristic
Shipping 25 kg (55 lb), characteristic
Dimensions
170 Chapter 7
Specifications
Inputs and Outputs
Inputs and Outputs
Internal
50 MHz osc a
Frequency 50 MHz
Frequency Accuracy Frequency reference error b
50 Ω Amplitude c −27 dBm, nominal
75 Ω Amplitude +24.8 dBmV, nominal

(Option 1DP)c
a. Turn the 50 MHz osc signal on/off by pressing the keys: System, Alignments, and 50 MHz
osc.
b. Frequency reference error = (aging rate × period of time since adjustment + settability +
c. The internal 50 MHz osc signal’s actual power may differ from the nominal value.
Front Panel
INPUT 50 Ω
Connector Type N female
Impedance 50 Ω, nominal
INPUT 75 Ω (Option 1DP)
Connector BNC female
Chapter 7 171
Specifications
Inputs and Outputs
RF OUT 50 Ω (Option 1DN)
Connector Type N female
RF OUT 75 Ω (Option 1DQ)
PROBE POWER
Voltage/Current +15 Vdc, ±7% at 150 mA max.,

characteristic
+12.6 Vdc ±10% at 150 mA

max., characteristic
EXT KEYBOARD Interface compatible with

most PC keyboards
Connector 6-pin mini-DIN
Speaker Front panel knob controls

volume
Headphone Front panel knob controls

volume
Connector 3.5 mm (1/8 inch) miniature

audio jack
Power Output 0.2 W into 4 Ω, characteristic
172 Chapter 7
Specifications
Inputs and Outputs
Rear Panel
10 MHz REF OUT
Output Amplitude >0 dBm, characteristic
10 MHz REF IN
Connector BNC female Note: Analyzer noise sideband

and spurious response
performance may be affected
by the quality of the external
reference used.
Input Amplitude Range −15 to +10 dBm, characteristic
Frequency 10 MHz, nominal
GATE TRIG/EXT TRIG IN
External Trigger Input
Trigger Level Positive edge initiates sweep

in EXT TRIG mode (5 V TTL)
Chapter 7 173
Specifications
Inputs and Outputs
GATE/HI SWP OUT
High Sweep Output
Level High = sweep;

Low = retrace (5 V TTL)
VGA OUTPUT
Connector VGA compatible, 15-pin mini

D-SUB
Format VGA (31.5 kHz horizontal, 60

Hz vertical sync rates,
non-interlaced) Analog RGB
Resolution 640 × 480
AUX IF OUT (Option A4J)
Frequency 21.4 MHz, nominal
Amplitude Range −10 to −70 dBm (uncorrected),

characteristic. A signal at the
reference level will produce a
−10 dBm nominal output.
AUX VIDEO OUT

(Option A4J)
Amplitude Range 0 to 1 V (uncorrected),

(into >10 kΩ) characteristic
174 Chapter 7
Specifications
Inputs and Outputs
HI SWP IN (Option A4J)
Input Open collector, low stops

sweep (5 V TTL)
HI SWP OUT (Option A4J)
Output High = sweep, Low = retrace

(5 V TTL)
SWP OUT (Option A4J)
Amplitude 0 to +10 V ramp,

characteristic
HP-IB Interface
(Option A4H)
Connector IEEE-488 bus connector
HP-IB Codes SH1, AH1, T6, SR1, RL1, PP0,

DC1, C1, C2, C3 and C28
Serial Interface
(Option 1AX)
Connector 9-pin D-SUB RS-232
Chapter 7 175
Specifications
Inputs and Outputs
Parallel Interface Printer port only

(Option A4H or 1AX)
Connector 25-pin D-SUB
176 Chapter 7
Specifications
Regulatory Information
CAUTION This product is designed for use in Installation Category II and
Pollution Degree 2 per IEC 1010 and 664 respectively.
NOTE This product has been designed and tested in accordance with IEC
Publication 1010, Safety Requirements for Electronic Measuring
Apparatus, and has been supplied in a safe condition. The instruction
documentation contains information and warnings which must be
followed by the user to ensure safe operation and to maintain the
product in a safe condition.
The CE mark is a registered trademark of the European Community (if

accompanied by a year, it is the year when the design was proven).
The CSA mark is the Canadian Standards Association safety mark.
ISM 1-A This is a symbol of an Industrial Scientific and Medical Group 1 Class A
product. (CISPER 11, Clause 4)
Chapter 7 177
Specifications
178 Chapter 7
8 Required Equipment
179
Required Equipment
Test Equipment
Test Equipment
Periodically verifying operation

The analyzer requires periodic verification of operation. Under most
conditions of use, you should test the analyzer at least once a year with
the complete set of performance verification tests.
Table 8-1 Recommended Test Equipment
Critical Specifications for Equipment Recommended

Equipment Use a
Substitution Model
Digital Multimeter Input Resistance: ≥10 megohms HP 3458A P,A,T

Accuracy: ±10 mV on 100 V range
DVM Test Leads For use with HP 3458A Digital Multimeter HP 34118B T
Universal Counter Time Interval Range: 25 ms to 100 ms Single HP 53132A or P,A,T

Operation Range: +2.5 Vdc to −2.5 Vdc HP 5316B
Frequency Frequency: 10 MHz Timebase Accuracy HP 5071A P,A

Standard (Aging): < 1 ×10-9/day
Measuring Receiver Compatible with Power Sensors dB Relative HP 8902A P,A,T

Mode Resolution: 0.01 dB
Reference Accuracy: ±1.2%
Microwave Frequency Range: 9 MHz to 7 GHz HP 5352B T

Frequency Counter Timebase Accuracy (Aging): <5 × 10-10/day
Oscilloscope Bandwidth: dc to 100 MHz HP 54501A T

Vertical Scale Factor of 0.5 V to 5 V/Div
Power Meter Compatible with power sensors dB relative HP 436A P,A,T

(Option 1DP) mode.
Resolution: 0.01 dB
Reference accuracy: ±1.2%
180 Chapter 8
Required Equipment
Test Equipment

Equipment Use a
Substitution Model
Power Sensor Frequency Range: 100 kHz to 1500 MHz HP 8482A P,A,T
Maximum SWR:
1.60 (100 kHz to 300 kHz)
1.20 (300 kHz to 1 MHz)
1.1 (1 MHz to 2.0 GHz)
Power Sensor, 75 Ω Frequency Range: 1 MHz to 1500 MHz HP 8483A P,A,T

(Option 1DP) Maximum SWR: 1.18 (600 kHz to 1500 MHz)
Impedance: 75 Ω
Amplitude Range: −30 dBm to +20 dBm
Power Sensor, Low Frequency Range: 300 MHz HP8481D or P,A,T

Power Amplitude Range: −20 dBm to −70 dBm HP 8484A
Maximum SWR: 1.1 (300 MHz)
Synthesized Signal Frequency Range: 1 MHz to 1000 MHz HP 8663A or P,A

Generator Amplitude Range: −35 to +16 dBm SSB Noise: HP 8642A/B
<−120 dBc/Hz at 20 kHz offset
Spectrum Analyzer, Frequency Range: 100 kHz to 7 GHz Relative HP 8566A/B P,T
Microwave Amplitude Accuracy: 100 kHz to 1.5 GHz:
<±1.8 dB
Frequency Accuracy: <±10 kHz @ 7 GHz
Synthesized Frequency Range: 10 MHz to 1.5 GHz HP 8340A/B or P,A,T

Sweeper Frequency Accuracy (CW): ±0.02% HP 83630A
Leveling Modes: Internal and External
Modulation Modes: AM
Power Level Range: −35 to +16 dBm
Synthesizer/ Frequency Range: 0.1 Hz to 20 MHz Frequency HP 33120A or P,A,T

Function Generator Accuracy: ±0.02% HP 3324A
Waveform: Triangle
Attenuator/Switch Compatible with HP 8494G and HP 8496G HP 11713A P

Driver Programmable step attenuators
Chapter 8 181
Required Equipment
Test Equipment

Equipment Use a
Substitution Model
Attenuator, 1 dB Attenuation Range: 0 to 11 dB HP 8494A/G P

Step Frequency Range: 4 GHz
Connectors: Type-N female
Calibrated at 50 MHz with accuracy of
0 to 11 dB attenuation: ±0.010 dB.
Attenuator, 10 dB Attenuation Range: 0 to 110 dB HP 8496A/G P

Step Frequency Range: 4 GHz
Connectors: Type-N female
Calibrated at 50 MHz with accuracy of:
0 to 40 dB attenuation: ±0.020 dB
50 to 100 dB attenuation: ±0.065 dB
110 dB attenuation: ±0.075 dB
Attenuator, 10 dB Nominal attenuation: 10 dB HP 8491A P

Fixed Frequency Range: dc to 12.4 GHz Option 020
Connectors: Type-N(m) and Type-N(f)
Attenuator Mechanically and electrically connects HP 11716 Series P

Interconnect Kit HP 8494A/G and HP 8496A/G
a. P = Performance Test, A = Adjustment, T = Troubleshooting
Table 8-2 Recommended Accessories
Critical Specifications for Accessory Recommended

Equipment Use a
Substitution Model
Active Probe 5 Hz to 500 MHz HP 41800A T
Active Probe 300 kHz to 3 GHz HP 85024A T
Attenuator, 3 dB Type-N (m to f) Attenuation: 3 dB Frequency: dc HP 8491A P

to 12.4 GHz Option 003
Attenuator, 10 dB Type-N (m to f) Frequency: 300 MHz HP 8491A P,A,T

Option 010
Attenuator, 20 dB Type-N (m to f) Attenuation: 20 dB Frequency: HP 8491A A

dc to 12.4 GHz Option 020
182 Chapter 8
Required Equipment
Test Equipment

Equipment Use a
Substitution Model
Coupler, 9 dB Coupling: Nominal 9 dB Insertion Loss: 2 dB 0955-0704 P,T
Directional Bridge Frequency Range: 0.1 to 110 MHz HP 8721A P,T

Directivity: >40 dB
Maximum VSWR: 1.1:1
Transmission Arm Loss: 6 dB nominal
Coupling Arm Loss: 6 dB nominal
6 GHz Directional Frequency Range: 5 MHz to 1.5 GHz HP 86205A P

Bridge Directivity: >40 dB
Coupling factor: 16 dB nominal
Insertion Loss: 2 dB maximum
Mechanical Adapter Type-N (f), 75 Ω to Type-N (m), 50 Ω 1259-0597 P,A,T

(Option 1DP)
Minimum Loss Pad Frequency Range: dc to 1.5 GHz HP 11852B P,A,T

(Option 1DP) Insertion loss: 5.7 dB, nominal
Power Splitter Frequency Range: 50 kHz to 1.5 GHz HP 11667A P,A

Insertion Loss: 6 dB nominal
Output Tracking: <0.25 dB
Equivalent Output SWR: <1.22:1
Termination, 50 Ω Impedance: 50 Ω nominal HP 908A P,T

(Option 1DN) Connector: Type-N (m) (2 required)
Termination, 50 Ω Impedance: 50 Ω (nominal) Connector: BNC (m) HP 11593A P,A
Filter, 50 MHz Low Cutoff frequency: 50 MHz 0955-0306 P

Pass Rejection at 65 MHz: >40 dB
Rejection at 75 MHz: >60 dB
Chapter 8 183
Required Equipment
Test Equipment

Equipment Use a
Substitution Model
Filter, 1 GHz Low Cutoff frequency: 1 GHz 0955-0487 P

Pass Rejection at 2 GHz: >60 dB
Termination, 75 Ω Impedance: 75 Ω (nominal) (2 required for HP 909E P,T

(Option 1DQ, 1DP) Option 1DQ) (1 required for Option 1DP) Option 201
Table 8-3 Recommended Adapters
Recommended
Critical Specifications for Adapter Substitution Use a
Model
BNC (f) to dual banana plug 1251-1277 P,A,T
BNC (m) to BNC (m) 1250-0216 P,T
BNC (m) to BNC (m), 75 Ω (Option 1DP) 1250-1288 P,T
BNC (f) to SMB (m) 1250-1237 T
BNC tee BNC (f,m,f) 1250-0781 A,T
SMB (m) to SMB (m) 1250-0813 T
Type-N (f) to APC 3.5 (f) 1250-1745 P,A,T
Type-N (f) to BNC (m) 1250-1477 P,T
Type-N (f) to BNC (m), 75 Ω (2 required for Option 1DP) 1250-1534 P,A,T
Type-N (m) to BNC (f) (4 required) 1250-1476 P,A,T
Type-N (f) to BNC (f), 75 Ω (Option 1DP) 1250-1536 P,T
Type-N (m) to BNC (m) (2 required) 1250-1473 P,T
Type-N (m) to BNC (m), 75 Ω (Option 1DP) 1250-1533 P,A,T
Type-N (f) to Type-N (f) 1250-1472 P,T
Type-N (m) to Type-N (m) 1250-1475 P,A,T
Type-N (f) to Type-N (f), 75 Ω (Option 1DP) 1250-1529 P,A,T
Type-N (f), 75 Ω, to Type-N (m), 50 Ω (Option 1DP) 1250-0597 P,A,T
Type-N (m) to SMA (f) (4 required) 1250-1250 P
184 Chapter 8
Required Equipment
Test Equipment
Recommended
Critical Specifications for Adapter Substitution Use a
Model
Type-N (m) to SMA (m) 1250-1636 P
SMB (f) to SMB (f) 1250-0692 T
50 to 75 Ω Minimum Loss HP 11852B P,A,T

Frequency Range: dc to 1.5 GHz
Insertion Loss: 5.7 dB (Option 1DP)
Table 8-4 Recommended Cables
Recommended
Critical Specifications for Cable Substitution Use a
Model
Frequency Range: dc to 1 GHz HP 10503A P,A,T

Length: ≥122 cm (48 in)
Connectors: BNC (m) both ends (4 required)
Type-N, 62 cm (24 in) HP 11500B/C P,T
Type-N, 152 cm (60 in) (2 required) HP 11500D P,A,T
SMA, 62 cm (24 in) (2 required) 1820-1578 P
Frequency Range: dc to 310 MHz HP 10502A P,T

Length: 23 cm (9 in)
Connectors: BNC (m) both ends
BNC, 75 Ω, 30 cm (12 in) (option 1DP) 5062-6452 P,A,T

Cable, Test 85680-60093 T
Length: ≥91 cm (36 in)
Connectors: SMB (f) to BNC (m) (2 required)
Chapter 8 185
Required Equipment
Test Equipment
186 Chapter 8
9 Performance Verification Tests
These tests verify the electrical performance of the analyzer. Allow the
analyzer to warm up in accordance with the temperature stability
specifications before performing the tests.
187
Performance Verification Tests
Tests included in this section:

1. 10 MHz Reference Accuracy
2. Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
3. Noise Sidebands
4. System Related Sidebands
5. Residual FM
6. Frequency Span Readout Accuracy
7. Reference Level Accuracy
8. Scale Fidelity
9. Input Attenuation Switching Uncertainty
10. Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy
11. Frequency Readout and Marker Count Accuracy
12. Absolute Amplitude Accuracy
13. Frequency Response
14. Spurious Responses
15. Gain Compression
16. Other Input Related Spurious Responses
17. Sweep Time Accuracy
18. Displayed Average Noise Level
19. Residual Responses
20. Tracking Generator Feedthrough Options IDN and IDQ
21. Absolute Amplitude, Vernier, and Power Sweep Accuracy,
Options 1DN and 1DQ
22. Tracking Generator Level Flatness, Options 1DN and 1DQ
23. Harmonic Spurious Outputs, Options 1DN and 1DQ
24. Non-Harmonic Spurious Outputs, Options 1DN and 1DQ
188 Chapter 9
Calibration
To perform calibration:
1. Run all performance verification tests listed in column 1 of Table 9-1.
2. If any of the performance verification tests fail, perform the
appropriate calibration adjustments listed in column 2 of Table 9-1
which corresponds to the failure.
3. Repeat ALL of the performance verification tests listed in column 1
of Table 9-1 if ANY calibration adjustments were made in step 2.
This will confirm that there is no interaction between adjustments
which could negatively impact board performance.
Table 9-1 lists the performance verification tests and adjustments
needed for calibration. The performance tests are located in the
following pages of this chapter. Adjustments are located in the service
guide.
Table 9-1 Calibration Requirements
Column 1 Column 2
Test #
Performance Verification Tests Calibration Adjustments
1 10 MHz Reference Accuracy 10 MHz Frequency Reference

Adjustment
2 Resolution Bandwidth Switching 21.4 MHz IF Calibrator

Uncertainty
3 Noise Sidebands None
4 System Related Sidebands None
5 Residual FM None
6 Frequency Span Readout Accuracy None
7 Reference Level Accuracy 21.4 MHz IF Calibrator
8 Scale Fidelity 21.4 MHz IF Calibrator
9 Input Attenuation Switching Uncorrected Flatness

Uncertainty Corrected Flatness
10 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy None
11 Frequency Readout and Marker None

Count Accuracy
12 Absolute Amplitude Accuracy 50 MHz Calibrator
13 Frequency Response Uncorrected Flatness

Corrected Flatness
14 Spurious Responses None
15 Gain Compression None
Chapter 9 189
Column 1 Column 2
Test #
Performance Verification Tests Calibration Adjustments
16 Other Input Related Spurious None

Responses
17 Sweep Time Accuracy None
18 Displayed Average Noise Level Frequency Response Adjustment
19 Residual Responses None
20 Tracking Generator Feedthrough, None

Option 1DN and 1DQ
21 Absolute Amplitude, Vernier, and Tracking Generator ALC Calibration

Power Sweep Accuracy, Tracking Generator Frequency Slope
Option 1DN and 1DQ
22 Tracking Generator Level Tracking Generator ALC Calibration

Flatness, Option 1DN and 1DQ Tracking Generator Frequency Slope
23 Harmonic Spurious Outputs, None

Option 1DN and 1DQ
24 Non-Harmonic Spurious Outputs, None

Option 1DN and 1DQ
Table 9-2 HP 11713A Settings for HP 8494G and HP 8496G
1 dB Attenuator X 10 dB Attenuator Y
Step Step
Atten Atten
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
(dB) (dB)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1 1 0 0 0 10 1 0 0 0
2 0 1 0 0 20 0 1 0 0
3 1 1 0 0 30 1 1 0 0
4 0 0 1 0 40 0 0 1 0
5 1 0 1 0 50 1 0 1 0
6 0 1 1 0 60 0 1 1 0
7 1 1 1 0 70 1 1 1 0
8 0 0 1 1 80 0 0 1 1
9 1 0 1 1 90 1 0 1 1
10 0 1 1 1 100 0 1 1 1
11 1 1 1 1 110 1 1 1 1
190 Chapter 9
When using the programmable versions of the 1 dB and 10 dB step

attenuator (HP 8494G and HP 8496G), the HP 11713A Attenuator/
Switch Driver must be used to control the attenuators. The HP 8494G
1 dB step attenuator should be connected as Attenuator X and the
HP 8496G 10 dB step attenuator should be connected as Attenuator Y.
Use Table 9-2 to determine the settings of Attenuator X and Attenuator
Y to set the step attenuators to the desired value. In the columns
labelled Attenuator X and Attenuator Y, a “1” indicates that section is
on (the LED in the button will be lit), while a “0” indicates that section
is off. For example, if the 1 dB step attenuator should be set to 2 dB and
the 10 dB step attenuator should be set to 60 dB, sections 2, 6, and 7
should be on (lit) and all other sections should be off.
Chapter 9 191

The settability is measured by changing the setting of the
digital-to-analog converter (DAC) which controls the frequency of the
timebase. The frequency difference per DAC step is calculated and
compared to the specification.
The related adjustment for this performance verification test is the
“10 MHz Frequency Reference Adjustment.”
Equipment Required
Universal counter (Instructions are for HP 53132A. For HP 5316B,
refer to its user documentation.)
Frequency standard
Cable, BNC, 122-cm (48-in) (2 required)
Figure 9-1 10 MHz Reference Test Setup
Procedure
1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-1. The frequency
standard provides the reference for the universal counter.
2. Ensure that the analyzer has been on for at least five minutes before
proceeding.
3. Set the frequency counter controls as follows:
a. Press Gate & ExtArm
b. Press any one of the arrow keys until DIGITS is displayed.
c. Press Gate & ExtArm again. Using the arrow keys, set the DIGITS
number to 9.
192 Chapter 9
d. Press Enter
e. Press Freq & Ratio
f. On Channel 1, press 50 Ω/1 MΩ = 50 Ω
4. Wait for the frequency counter reading to stabilize. Record the
frequency counter reading in Table 9-3 as Counter Reading 1.
5. Set the analyzer by pressing the following keys:
System, Alignments, Timebase, Fine
6. Record the number in the active function block of the analyzer in

Table 9-3 as Timebase Fine.
7. Press the ↑ (up arrow) key on the analyzer.
8. Wait for the frequency counter reading to stabilize. Record the
9. Press the ↓ (down arrow) key on the analyzer 2 times.
10.Wait for the frequency counter reading to stabilize. Record the
Table 9-3 10 MHz Reference Accuracy Worksheet
Description Measurement
Counter Reading 1 ____________ Hz
Timebase Fine ____________
11.Calculate the frequency settability by performing the following

steps:
• Calculate the frequency difference between Counter Reading 2
and Counter Reading 1.
• Calculate the frequency difference between Counter Reading 3
and Counter Reading 1.
• Divide the difference with the greatest absolute value by two and
record the value as TR Entry 1 of the performance verification
test record.
• Turn the analyzer power Off and On. The timebase DAC will be
reset automatically to the value recorded in step 6.
Chapter 9 193
2. Resolution Bandwidth Switching

Uncertainty
To measure the absolute amplitude calibration uncertainty the 50 MHz
internal signal is measured after the auto alignment routine is finished.
To measure the resolution bandwidth switching uncertainty an
amplitude reference is taken with the resolution bandwidth set to
3 kHz using the marker ∆ function. The resolution bandwidth is
changed to settings between 3 MHz and 1 kHz and the amplitude
variation is measured at each setting and compared to the specification.
The span is changed as necessary to maintain approximately the same
aspect ratio.
Procedure
1. Press Preset on the analyzer, then wait for the preset routine to
finish. Set the analyzer controls by pressing the following keys:
System, 50 MHz osc On Off (On)
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, 10 MHz
Peak Search
Frequency, Signal Track On Off (On)
Span, 50 kHz
Amplitude, Amptd Units, dBm, Done
Amplitude, −20 dBm
Scale/Div, 1 dB
BW/Avg, 3 kHz
Video BW Auto Man, 1 kHz
2. Press Amplitude and use the RPG to adjust the reference level until
the signal appears five divisions below the reference level, then press
the following keys:
Peak Search
Marker, Marker ∆
3. Set the analyzer resolution bandwidth and span according to

Table 9-4.
194 Chapter 9
4. Press Peak Search, then record the Sig ∆-Trk amplitude reading in
the performance verification test record as indicated in Table 9-4.
5. Repeat step 3 and step 4 for each of the remaining resolution
bandwidth and span settings listed in Table 9-4.
Table 9-4 Resolution Bandwidth Switching Uncertainty
Sig-∆-Trk
Analyzer Amplitude
Reading
RES BW Setting SPAN Setting TR Entry
3 kHz 50 kHz 0 (Ref)
1 kHz 50 kHz 1
10 kHz 50 kHz 2
30 kHz 500 kHz 3
100 kHz 500 kHz 4
300 kHz 5 MHz 5
1 MHz 10 MHz 6
3 MHz 10 MHz 7
Chapter 9 195
3. Noise Sidebands
3. Noise Sidebands
A 500 MHz CW signal is applied to the input of the analyzer. The
marker functions are used to measure the amplitude of the carrier and
the noise level 10 kHz, 20 kHz, 30 kHz, and 100 kHz above and below
the carrier. The difference between these two measurements is
compared to specification.
There are no related adjustment procedures for this performance test.
Equipment Required
Synthesized signal generator
Cable, Type-N, 152-cm (60-in)
Additional Equipment for 75 Ω Input

Pad, minimum loss
Adapter, Type-N (f), to BNC (m), 75 Ω
Figure 9-2 Noise Sidebands Test Setup
CAUTION Use only 75 Ω cables, connectors, or adapters on instruments with 75 Ω

connectors, or damage to the connectors will occur.
196 Chapter 9
3. Noise Sidebands
Procedure
This performance test consists of four parts:
Part 1: Noise Sideband Suppression at 10 kHz
Perform part 1 before performing part 2 or part 3 of this procedure.
A worksheet is provided at the end of this procedure for calculating the
noise sideband suppression.

1. Perform the following steps to set up the equipment:
a. Set the synthesized signal generator controls as follows:
FREQUENCY, 500 MHz
AMPLITUDE, 0 dBm (50 Ω Input only)
AMPLITUDE, to +6 dBm (75 Ω Input only)
AM OFF
FM OFF
b. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-2.

c. Press Preset on the analyzer, then wait for the preset routine to
finish. Set the analyzer by pressing the following keys:
Frequency, 500 MHz
Span, 10 MHz
Amplitude, Amptd Units, dBm
Done
2. Press the following analyzer keys to measure the carrier amplitude.

Peak Search
Span, 50 kHz
BW/Avg, 1 kHz
Video BW Auto Man, 30 Hz
Frequency, Signal Track On Off (Off)
Sweep, Sweep Time, 5 sec
Chapter 9 197
3. Noise Sidebands
Single Sweep
Wait for the completion of a sweep, then press Peak Search.

3. Press the following analyzer keys to measure the noise sideband
level at +10 kHz:
Marker, Marker ∆
Marker Noise On Off(On)
Frequency, CF Step, 10 kHz
Center Freq ↑
Span, Zero Span
Single Sweep
Record the marker delta amplitude reading in Table 9-5 as the Noise
Sideband Level at +10 kHz.
level at −10 kHz:
Frequency ↓, ↓
Single Sweep
Record the marker amplitude reading in the Noise Sideband

Worksheet as the Noise Sideband Level at −10 kHz.
5. Record the more positive value, either Noise Sideband Level at
+10 kHz or Noise Sideband Level at −10 kHz from the Noise
Sideband Worksheet as TR Entry 1 in the performance verification
test record.
6. Press Frequency, ↑

level at +20 kHz:
Center Freq, ↑
Single Sweep

Worksheet as the Noise Sideband Level at +20 kHz.
level at −20 kHz:
Frequency, ↓, ↓
Single Sweep
198 Chapter 9
3. Noise Sidebands

test record.

level at +30 kHz:
Center Freq, ↑
Single Sweep

level at −30 kHz:
Frequency, ↓, ↓
Single Sweep

test record.

level at +100 kHz:
Center Freq, ↑
Single Sweep

Chapter 9 199
3. Noise Sidebands

level at −100 kHz:
Frequency, ↓, ↓
Single Sweep

Sideband Worksheet as TR Entry 4 in the performance test
verification record.
Table 9-5 Noise Sideband Worksheet
Description Measurement
Noise Sideband Level at +10 kHz ____________ dBc/Hz
Noise Sideband Level at −10 kHz ____________ dBc/Hz
200 Chapter 9

A 500 MHz CW signal is applied to the input of the analyzer. The
marker functions are used to measure the amplitude of the carrier and
the amplitude of any system related sidebands 30 kHz above and below
the carrier. System related sidebands are any internally generated line
related, power supply related or local oscillator related sidebands.
Equipment Required

Pad, minimum loss
Figure 9-3 System Related Sidebands Test Setup

Chapter 9 201
Procedure
a. Set the synthesized signal generator controls as follows:
FREQUENCY, 500 MHz
AMPLITUDE, +6 dBm (75 Ω Input only)
AM Off
FM Off
b. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-3.

c. Press Preset on the analyzer, then wait for the preset routine to
Frequency, 500 MHz
Span, 10 MHz
2. Set the analyzer to measure the system related sideband above the
signal by performing the following steps:
a. Press the following keys:
Peak Search
Span, 200 kHz
BW/Avg, 1 kHz
Allow the analyzer to take two complete sweeps. Then press the
following keys:
CF Step Auto Man, 130 kHz
b. Press Single Sweep and wait for the completion of the sweep.
Press Peak Search, then Marker, Marker ∆.
c. Press the following analyzer keys:
Frequency
↑ (step-up key)
3. Measure the system related sideband above the signal by pressing

Single Sweep on the analyzer. Wait for the completion of a new
sweep, then press Peak Search.
202 Chapter 9
4. Record the marker delta amplitude as TR Entry 1 of the

performance verification test record.
5. Set the analyzer to measure the system related sideband below the
signal by pressing the following analyzer keys:
↓ (step-down key)
↓ (step-down key)
6. Measure the system related sideband below the signal by pressing

Single Sweep. Wait for the completion of a new sweep, then press
Peak Search.
Record the marker delta amplitude as TR Entry 2 of the

Chapter 9 203
5. Residual FM
5. Residual FM
This test measures the inherent short-term instability of the analyzer
LO system. With the analyzer in zero span, a stable signal is applied to
the input and slope-detected on the linear portion of the IF bandwidth
filter skirt. Any instability in the LO transfers to the IF signal in the
mixing process. The test determines the slope of the IF filter in Hz/dB
and then measures the signal amplitude variation caused by the
residual FM. Multiplying these two values yields the residual FM in
Hz.
Equipment Required

Pad, minimum loss
Figure 9-4 Residual FM Test Setup

204 Chapter 9
5. Residual FM
Procedure
Part 1: Residual FM
Determining the IF Filter Slope

1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-4.
2. Set the synthesized signal generator controls as follows:
FREQUENCY, 500 MHz
AMPLITUDE, −10 dBm (50 Ω Input only)
AM OFF
FM OFF
Frequency, 500 MHz
Span, 1 MHz
Amplitude, −9 dBm (50 Ω Input only)
Amplitude, 39.8 dBmV (75 Ω Input only)
Scale/Div, 2 dB
BW/Avg, 1 kHz
4. On the analyzer, press the following keys:

Peak Search
Span, Span Zoom, 10 kHz
Wait for the Span 10kHz message to appear. Press the following
analyzer keys:
Search, Marker → Ref Lvl
Marker, Marker 1 On Off (Off)

Single Sweep
Peak Search
Marker, Marker ∆
Chapter 9 205
5. Residual FM
6. Rotate the analyzer RPG counterclockwise until the marker ∆

amplitude reads −8 dB ±0.3 dB. Press Marker ∆. Rotate the knob
counterclockwise until the marker ∆ amplitude reads −4 dB ±0.3 dB.
If you have difficulty achieving the ±0.3 dB setting, then make the
following analyzer settings:
Sweep, Sweep Cont Single (Cont)
Span, 5 kHz
BW/Avg, Video BW Auto Man, 30 Hz
Repeat step 5
7. Divide the marker delta frequency in hertz by the marker delta
amplitude in dB to obtain the slope of the resolution bandwidth
filter. For example, if the marker delta frequency is 1.08 kHz and the
marker delta amplitude is 3.92 dB, the slope would be equal to
75.3 Hz/dB. Record the result below:
Slope ____________ Hz/ dB
Measuring the Residual FM

8. On the analyzer, press Marker, Marker All Off, Peak Search, then
Marker, Marker ∆. Rotate the knob counterclockwise until the marker
∆ amplitude reads −10 dB ±0.3 dB.
Marker, Marker Normal
Search, Mkr → CF
Single Sweep
BW/Avg, Video BW Auto Man, 1 kHz

Span, Zero Span
Sweep, 100 msec
Press Single Sweep.
NOTE The displayed trace should be about five divisions below the reference
level. If it is not, press Sweep, Sweep Cont Single (Cont), Frequency, and
use the knob to place the displayed trace about five divisions below the
reference level. Press Single Sweep.
10.On the analyzer, press Search, More, Pk-Pk Search. Read the marker
delta amplitude, take its absolute value, and record the result as the
Deviation.
Deviation ____________ dB
206 Chapter 9
5. Residual FM
11.Calculate the Residual FM by multiplying the Slope recorded in step

7 by the Deviation recorded in step 10.
Record this value as TR Entry 1 of the performance verification test
record.
Chapter 9 207

For testing each frequency span, two synthesized sources are used to
provide two precisely-spaced signals. The analyzer marker functions
are used to measure this frequency difference and the marker reading
is compared to the specification.
Equipment Required
Synthesized sweeper
Power splitter
Adapter, Type-N (m) to Type-N (m)
Adapter, Type-N (f) to APC 3.5 (f)
Cable, Type-N, 152-cm (60-in) (2 required)
Cable, BNC, 122-cm (48-in)

Pad, minimum loss
Procedure
Full Span Frequency Span Readout Accuracy

1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-5. Note that the power
splitter is used as a combiner. The synthesized signal generator
provides the frequency reference for the synthesized sweeper.
finish.
3. Press INSTRUMENT PRESET on the synthesized sweeper and set the
controls as follows:
CW, 1350 MHz
POWER LEVEL, −5 dBm
208 Chapter 9
4. On the synthesized signal generator, set the controls as follows:

FREQUENCY, 150 MHz
AMPLITUDE, 0 dBm
Figure 9-5 Frequency Span Readout Accuracy Test Setup
5. Adjust the analyzer center frequency, if necessary, to place the lower

frequency on the second vertical graticule line (one division from the
left-most graticule line).
6. On the analyzer, press Single Sweep. Wait for the completion of a new
sweep, then press the following keys:
Peak Search
Marker, Marker ∆
Search, Next Pk Right
The two markers should be on the signals near the second and tenth
vertical graticule lines (the first graticule line is the left-most).
Chapter 9 209
7. If necessary, continue pressing Next Pk Right until the active marker

is on the right-most signal (1350 MHz).
8. Record the marker delta frequency reading as TR Entry 1 of the
100 kHz and 100 MHz Frequency Span Readout

Accuracy
Frequency, Start Freq, 10 MHz, Stop Freq, 110 MHz, Sweep, Sweep
Cont Single (Cont)
10.On the synthesized sweeper set the controls as follows:

CW, 100 MHz
11.Set the synthesized signal generator controls as follows:

FREQUENCY, 20 MHz
AMPLITUDE, 0 dBm
12.Adjust the analyzer center frequency to center the two signals on the
display.
13.On the analyzer, press Single Sweep. Wait for the completion of a
new sweep, then press the following keys:
Peak Search
Marker, Marker ∆
The two markers should be on the signals near the second and tenth
vertical graticule lines (the first graticule line is the left-most).
14.If necessary, continue pressing Next Pk Right until the active marker
is on the right-most signal (100 MHz). Record the marker delta
frequency reading in the performance test record as TR Entry 2.
15.Press Marker, Marker All Off on the analyzer.
16.Change to the next equipment settings listed in Table 9-6.
17.On the analyzer, press Single Sweep. Wait for the completion of a
new sweep, then press the following keys:
Peak Search
Marker, Marker ∆
210 Chapter 9
18.Continue pressing Next Pk Right until the marker delta on the

right-most signal. Record the marker delta frequency reading in the
performance test record.
19.Repeat step 15 through step 18 for the remaining analyzer span
settings listed in Table 9-6.
Table 9-6 Frequency Span Readout Accuracy
Synthesized
Analyzer Analyzer Synthesized
Signal Analyzer
Start Stop Sweeper TR
Generator Span
Frequency Frequency Frequency Entry
Frequency (MHz)
(MHz) (MHz) (MHz)
(MHz)
0 1500 150 1350 1 1500
10 110 20 100 2 100
10 10.1 10.01 10.09 3 0.1
800 900 810 890 4 100
800 800.1 800.01 800.09 5 0.1
1400 1500 1410 1490 6 100
1499 1499.1 1499.01 1499.09 7 0.1
Chapter 9 211

A 50 MHz CW signal is applied to the Input 50 Ω of the analyzer
through two step attenuators. The amplitude of the source is decreased
in 10 dB steps and the analyzer marker functions are used to measure
the amplitude difference between steps. The source’s internal
attenuator is used as the reference standard. The test is performed in
both log and linear amplitude scales.
It is only necessary to test reference levels as low as −90 dBm (with
10 dB attenuation) since lower reference levels are a function of the
analyzer microprocessor manipulating the trace data. There is no error
associated with the trace data manipulation.
Equipment Required
1 dB step attenuator
Attenuator/ switch driver (if programmable step attenuators are
used)
Cable, Type-N 152-cm (60-in)
Cable, BNC 122-cm (48-in) (2 required)
Attenuator interconnect kit
Adapter, Type-N (m) to BNC (f) (2 required)

Pad, minimum loss
Procedure
Calculate Actual Attenuation Errors
1. From the calibration data supplied with the 10 dB step attenuator,
enter into column 2 of Table 9-7 and Table 9-8 the actual attenuation
for the corresponding nominal attenuation settings. If using a
programmable attenuator, enter the data for the section three 40 dB
step.
2. Calculate the reference attenuation error by subtracting 40 dB from
the actual attenuation for the 40 dB setting, and enter below.
212 Chapter 9
Reference Atten Error = Actual Attenuation (40 dB) – 40 dB

Reference Atten Error ____________ dB
3. To calculate the attenuation error at other nominal attenuator
settings, subtract the attenuation error at the other settings from
the reference atten error and enter the result in column 3 of
Table 9-7 and Table 9-8.
Atten Error (X dB) = (Actual Attenuation (X dB) – Nominal Attenuation (X dB)) – Reference Atten Error
Example for 50 dB setting:

Actual Attenuation (40 dB) = 40.15 dB
Actual Attenuation (50 dB) = 50.08 dB
Reference Atten Error = 40.15 dB – 40 dB = 0.15 dB
Atten Error (50 dB) = ( 50.08 dB – 50 dB ) – 0.15 dB
= 0.08 dB – 0.15 dB
= – 0.07 dB
Log Scale
FREQUENCY, 50 MHz
AMPLITUDE, +10 dBm
AM OFF
FM OFF
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-6. Set the 10 dB step

attenuator to 30 dB attenuation and the 1 dB step attenuator to
10 dB attenuation.
75 Ω Input only: Set the 1 dB step attenuator to 10 dB.
Chapter 9 213
Figure 9-6 Reference Level Accuracy Test Setup
finish. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off. Set the analyzer by
pressing the following keys:
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, 10 MHz
Peak Search
Span, 50 kHz
Amplitude, +21.76 dBmV (75 Ω Input only)
Attenuation Auto Man, 5 dB
Scale/Div, 1 dB
BW/Avg, 3 kHz, Video BW Auto Man, 30 Hz
4. Set the 1 dB step attenuator to place the signal peak 1 to 3 dB (one

to three divisions) below the reference level. Refer to Table 9-2
earlier in this chapter for information on manually controlling a
programmable step attenuator with an HP 11713A attenuator/
switch driver.
214 Chapter 9

Single Sweep
Peak Search
Marker, Marker ∆
6. Set the 10 dB step attenuator and analyzer reference level according

to Table 9-7. At each setting, do the following:
a. Press Single Sweep on the analyzer.
b. Press Peak Search
c. Record the marker delta amplitude reading in column 5 of
Table 9-7.
d. Add the actual attenuation error to the analyzer marker ∆
amplitude and enter the result in the performance test record.
Example: for −40 dBm reference level:
Analyzer marker ∆ amplitude = +0.17 dB
Attenuation Error (50 dB) = −0.07 dB
TR Entry 4 = 0.17 dB – 0.07 dB = 0.10 dB
NOTE When entering reference levels on analyzers with 75 Ω inputs, enter the
values in dBmV with 0.01 dB precision. That is, −8.24 dBmV not
−8.2 dBmV. The reference level annotation rounds to the nearest 0.1 dB,
but internal values are to the nearest 0.01 dB.
Chapter 9 215
Table 9-7 Reference Level Accuracy, Log Mode
10 dB 10 dB Analyzer
Analyzer
Attenuator Attenuator Reference
Attenuation Marker ∆
Nominal Actual Levela TR Entry
Error dB Amplitude
Attenuation Attenuation
dB
dB dB dBm dBmV
30 0 (Ref) −30 +21.76 0 (Ref)
20 −20 +31.76 1
10 −10 +41.76 2
40 −40 +11.76 3
50 −50 +1.76 4
60 −60 −8.24 5
70 −70 −18.24 6
80 −80 −28.24 7
90 −90 −38.24 8
a. Use the dBm column values for analyzers with a 50 Ω

input and the dBmV column for analyzers with a 75 Ω input.
Linear Scale
7. Set the 10 dB step attenuator to 30 dB attenuation.
8. Set the 1 dB step attenuator to 10 dB attenuation.
75 Ω Input only: Set the 1 dB step attenuator to 0 dB.
9. Set the analyzer controls as follows:
Amplitude, −30 dBm (50 Ω Input)
Amplitude, +21.76 dBmV (75 Ω Input)
Scale Type Log Lin (Lin)
Amplitude, Amptd Units, dBm (50 Ω Input)
Amplitude, Amptd Units, dBmV (75 Ω Input)
Marker, Marker All Off
10.Set the 1 dB step attenuator to place the signal peak one to three
divisions below the reference level.
11.On the analyzer, press the following keys:
Single Sweep
216 Chapter 9
Peak Search
Marker, Marker ∆
12.Set the 10 dB step attenuator and analyzer reference level according

to Table 9-8. At each setting, do the following:
a. Press Single Sweep on the analyzer.
b. Press Peak Search
c. Record the marker delta amplitude reading in column 5 of
Table 9-8.
d. Add the actual attenuation error to the analyzer marker ∆
amplitude and enter the result in the performance test record.
NOTE When entering reference levels on analyzers with 75 Ω inputs, enter the
values in dBmV with 0.01 dB precision. That is, −8.24 dBmV not
−8.2 dBmV. The reference level annotation rounds to the nearest 0.1 dB,
but internal values are to the nearest 0.01 dB.
Table 9-8 Reference Level Accuracy, Linear Mode
10 dB 10 dB Analyzer
Analyzer
Attenuator Attenuator Reference Levela
Attenuation Marker ∆
Nominal Actual TR Entry
Error dB Amplitude
Attenuation Attenuation
dB
dB dB dBm dBmV
30 0 (Ref) −30 +21.76 0 (Ref)
20 −20 +31.76 9
10 −10 +41.76 10
40 −40 +11.76 11
50 −50 +1.76 12
60 −60 −8.24 13
70 −70 −18.24 14
80 −80 −28.24 15
90 −90 −38.24 16
a. Use the dBm column values for analyzers with a 50 Ω

input and the dBmV column for analyzers with a 75 Ω ινπυτ.
13.Press Preset, System, Alignments, Auto Align, All.
Chapter 9 217
8. Scale Fidelity
8. Scale Fidelity
A 50 MHz CW signal is applied to the input of the analyzer through two
calibrated step attenuators. The attenuators are the amplitude
reference standard. The source is adjusted for a response at the
reference level. The attenuators are then set to achieve a nominal
amplitude below the reference level. The analyzer’s amplitude marker
is compared to the actual total attenuation to determine the scale
fidelity error.
The test is performed in both log and linear amplitude scales.
Equipment Required
used)

Pad, minimum loss
218 Chapter 9
8. Scale Fidelity
Figure 9-7 Scale Fidelity Test Setup

Procedure
Calculate Actual Attenuation Values

enter into column 3 of Table 9-9 and Table 9-10 the actual
attenuation for the corresponding nominal attenuation settings. If
the calibration data does not indicate an actual attenuation value for
the 0 dB setting, enter 0 dB. If using a programmable attenuator,
enter the data for the section three 4 dB step.
enter into column 5 of Table 9-9 and Table 9-10 the actual
attenuation for the corresponding nominal attenuation settings. If
Chapter 9 219
8. Scale Fidelity
the calibration data does not indicate an actual attenuation value for
the 0 dB setting, enter 0 dB. If using a programmable attenuator,
enter the data for the section three 40 dB step.
3. For each dB from REF LVL (including 0 dB) setting indicated in
Table 9-9 and Table 9-10, calculate the total actual attenuation from
the actual attenuation columns for the 1 dB and the 10 dB step
attenuators. For example, if the actual 1 dB step attenuator
attenuation for the 6 dB setting is 5.998 dB and the actual 10 dB
step attenuator attenuation for the 30 dB setting is 30.012 dB, the
total actual attenuation for the −36 dB from REF LVL setting would
be:
Total Actual Attenuation = 5.998 dB + 30.012 dB = 36.01 dB
Table 9-9 Cumulative and Incremental Log Fidelity
1 dB 1 dB 10 dB 10 dB TR Entry
TR Entry
dB step step step step Total Mkr Incre-
Cumul-
from atten. atten. atten. atten. Actual ∆ mental
ative Log
REF Nominal Actual Nominal Actual Attenu- Read- Log
Fidelity
LVL Attenu- Attenu- Attenu- Attenu- ation ing Fidelity
Error
ation ation ation ation Error
(dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)
0 (Ref) 0 0 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref)
−4 4 0 1 22
−8 8 0 2 23
−12 2 10 3 24
−16 6 10 4 25
−20 0 20 5 26
−24 4 20 6 27
−28 8 20 7 28
−32 2 30 8 29
−36 6 30 9 30
−40 0 40 10 31
−44 4 40 11 32
−48 8 40 12 33
−52 2 50 13 34
−56 6 50 14 35
220 Chapter 9
8. Scale Fidelity
1 dB 1 dB 10 dB 10 dB TR Entry
TR Entry
dB step step step step Total Mkr Incre-
Cumul-
from atten. atten. atten. atten. Actual ∆ mental
ative Log
REF Nominal Actual Nominal Actual Attenu- Read- Log
Fidelity
LVL Attenu- Attenu- Attenu- Attenu- ation ing Fidelity
Error
ation ation ation ation Error
(dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)
−60 0 60 15 36
−64 4 60 16 37
−68 8 60 17 38
−72 2 70 18 N/A
−76 6 70 19 N/A
−80 0 80 20 N/A
−84 4 80 21 N/A
Log Scale
Setup for Log Scale Measurement

1. Connect the equipment as indicated in Figure 9-7. The synthesized
signal generator provides the frequency reference for the analyzer.
2. Press Preset on the analyzer. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align,
Off. Set the controls as follows:
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, 45 kHz
Amplitude, Attenuation Auto Man, 10 dB
BW/Avg, Resolution BW Auto Man, 3 kHz
Video BW, 1 kHz
3. Preset the synthesized signal generator and set the controls as

follows:
FREQUENCY, 50 MHz
AM OFF
FM OFF
Chapter 9 221
8. Scale Fidelity
4. Set the step attenuators to 0 dB attenuation. Refer to Table 9-2

programmable step attenuator with an HP 11713A attenuator /
switch driver.
5. Press Peak Search on the analyzer.
6. Adjust the synthesized signal generator’s amplitude until the
analyzer’s marker amplitude reads 0 dBm ± 0.1 dB.
75 Ω Input only: Adjust the synthesized signal generator’s amplitude
until the analyzer’s marker reads 48.8 dBmV ± 0.1 dB.
7. On the analyzer, press Marker, Marker ∆.
8. Do not adjust the synthesized signal generator’s amplitude after the
reference is established.
Measure Cumulative Log Fidelity

1. Set the 1 dB and 10 dB step attenuators as indicated in Table 9-9 for
the −4 dB from REF LVL setting.
2. Press Peak Search on the analyzer and record the Mkr ∆ reading in
column 7 of Table 9-9.
3. Calculate the Cumulative Log Fidelity Error (CLFE) as follows and
record the result in the performance verification test record as
indicated in column 8 of Table 9-9:
CLFE = Total Actual Atten ( – 4 dB from RL )
+Delta MKR Reading – Total Actual Atten (0 dB from RL)
4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 for the remaining ”dB from REF LVL”
settings indicated in Table 9-9. For each setting of −64 dB and lower,
press the following analyzer keys after step 1:
BW/Avg, Video Average On Off (On)
5, Enter
Calculate Incremental Log Fidelity

1. Calculate the Incremental Log Fidelity Error (ILFE) for ”dB from
REF LVL” settings of −4 dB to −68 dB using the current and previous
Cumulative Log Fidelity Errors (CLFEs):
ILFE = CLFE (current) – CLFE (previous)
For example, if the CLFE for the −16 dB from REF LVL setting is
−0.07 dB and the CLFE for the −20 dB from REF LVL setting is
+0.02 dB, the ILFE for the −20 dB from REF LVL settings is:
ILFE ( – 20 dB ) = 0.02 dB – (0.07 dB) = 0.09 dB
222 Chapter 9
8. Scale Fidelity
Record the result in the performance verification test record as

indicated in column 9 of Table 9-9.
Linear Scale
Setup for Linear Scale Measurement

1. Press Preset on the analyzer. Set the controls as follows:
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, 10 kHz
Video BW, 100 Hz
Amplitude, Scale Type Log Lin (Lin)
More, Input Z Corr, 50

follows:
FREQUENCY, 50 MHz
AM OFF
FM OFF
3. Set the step attenuators to 0 dB attenuation. Refer to Table 9-2

programmable step attenuator with an HP 11713A Attenuator /
Switch Driver.
analyzer’s marker amplitude read 223.6 mV ± 4 mV.
223.6 mV reference is established
Chapter 9 223
8. Scale Fidelity
Table 9-10 Linear Fidelity
1 dB 10 dB 10 dB TR
1 dB step
dB step step step Total Entry
atten Ideal Actual
from atten atten. atten. Actual
Nominal Mkr Mkr
Ref Actual Nominal Actual Attenu- Linear
Attenu- Reading Reading
Level Attenu- Attenu- Attenu- ation Fidelity
ation
ation ation ation Error
dB dB dB dB dB dB mV mV % of RL
0 (Ref) 0 0 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref)
−4 4 0 39
−8 8 0 40
−12 2 10 41
−16 6 10 42
−20 0 20 43
Calculate Ideal Marker Amplitude

Considering Total Actual Attenuation at the 0 dB from Ref Level
setting to be ATref, and the Total Actual Attenuation at any other
dB from Ref Level setting to be ATmeas, calculate the Ideal Mkr
Reading, in millivolts, as follows and enter the result in column 7 of
Table 9-10:
Ideal Mkr Reading (mv) = 1000 × SQRT [ 0.05 × 10 ( ( – ATmeas + ATref ) ⁄ 10 ) ]
For example, if ATref = 0.012 dB and ATmeas = 7.982, the Ideal Mkr
Reading for the −8 dB from Ref Level setting would be:
Ideal Mkr Reading
= 1000 × SQRT [ 0.05 × 10 ( ( – 7.982 + 0.012 ) ⁄ 10 ) ]
= 1000 × SQRT [ 0.05 × 10 ( –7.97 ⁄ 10 ) ]
= 1000 × SQRT [ 0.05 × 10 ( –0.797 ) ]
= 1000 × SQRT [ 0.05 × 0.15959 ]
= 1000 × SQRT [ 0.007979 ]
= 1000 × 0.0893
= 89.3mV
224 Chapter 9
8. Scale Fidelity
Measure Linear Fidelity

1. Set the 1 dB and 10 dB step attenuators as indicated in Table 9-10
for the −4 dB from REF LVL setting.
2. Press Peak Search on the analyzer and record the Mkr amplitude
reading in column 8 of Table 9-10.
3. Calculate the Linear Fidelity Error (LFE) as a percentage of
reference level (RL), and record the result in the performance
verification test record as indicated in column 9 of Table 9-10.
LFE(% of RL) = 100 x (Actual Mkr Reading − Ideal Mkr Reading)
/223.6 mV
For example, if the Ideal Mkr Reading is 89.3 mV and the Actual
Mkr Reading is 85 mV, the Linear Fidelity Error would be:
LFE
= 100 x (85 − 89.3) / 223.6
= 100 x (−4.3) / 223.6
= 100 x 0.0192
= 1.92% of RL
4. Repeat step 1 through step 3 above for the remaining dB from Ref
Level settings indicated in Table 9-10.
5. Press Preset, System, Alignments, Auto Align, All on the analyzer.
6. 75 Ω Input only: Press Amplitude, More, Input Z Corr 75
Chapter 9 225

A 50 MHz CW signal is applied to the input of the analyzer through two
calibrated step attenuators. The attenuators are the amplitude
reference standard. The source is adjusted for a response at the
reference level. The attenuators are then set to achieve a nominal
amplitude below the reference level. The analyzer’s amplitude marker
is compared to the actual total attenuation to determine the scale
fidelity error.
The spectrum analyzer marker functions are used to measure the
amplitude differences. The step attenuator’s actual attenuation values
are used to correct the marker amplitude readings, yielding the input
attenuation switching error.
Equipment Required
used)
10 dB fixed attenuator

Pad, minimum loss
226 Chapter 9
Figure 9-8 Input Attenuator Switching Uncertainty Test Setup

Procedure
Calculate Actual Attenuation Values

enter into column 2 of Table 9-11 the actual attenuation for the
corresponding nominal attenuation settings. If the calibration data
does not indicate an actual attenuation value for the 0 dB setting,
enter 0 dB.
enter into column 4 of Table 9-11 the actual attenuation for the
corresponding nominal attenuation settings. If the calibration data
does not indicate an actual attenuation value for the 0 dB setting,
enter 0 dB.
Chapter 9 227
3. For each total nominal attenuation setting indicated in Table 9-11,

calculate the total actual attenuation from the actual attenuation
columns for the 1 dB and the 10 dB step attenuators and enter the
result in Table 9-11. For example, if the actual 1 dB step attenuator
attenuation for the 5 dB setting is 5.021 dB and the actual 10 dB
step attenuator attenuation for the 30 dB setting is 29.981 dB, the
total actual attenuation for the 35 dB total nominal attenuation
settings would be:
Total Actual Attenuation = 5.021 dB + 29.981 dB = 35.002 dB
4. Calculate the attenuation error by subtracting the difference
between the actual and nominal attenuations for each total nominal
attenuations from the difference between the actual and
nominal attenuations for the 50 dB total nominal attenuation:
AttenErr = ( ActAtten ( 50 dB ) – 50 dB ) – ( ActAtten ( XdB ) – NomAtten ( XdB ) )
Where:
AttenErr = Attenuator Error between the X dB and 50 dB settings
ActAtten(50 dB) = Actual Attenuation of the 50 dB setting
ActAtten(XdB) = Actual Attenuation of the X dB setting
NomAtten(XdB) = Nominal Attenuation of the X dB setting
Example:
ActAtten (50 dB) = 50.15 dB
ActAtten (35 dB) = 35.002 dB
NomAtten (35 dB) = 35 dB
AttenErr = ( 50.15 – 50 ) – ( 35.002 – 35 )

= 0.15 – 0.002
= 0.148 dB
Record the Attenuation Errors in Table 9-12 for the appropriate
Total Nominal Attenuation setting. Note that the Total Nominal
Attenuations listed in Table 9-12 are in a different order than those
listed in Table 9-11.
228 Chapter 9
Table 9-11 Actual Attenuation Worksheet
1 dB step 1 dB step 10 dB step 10 dB step

Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator Attenuator Total Total
Nominal Actual Nominal Actual Nominal Actual
Attenuation Attenuation Attenuation Attenuation Attenuation Attenuation
(dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB) (dB)
0 0 0
5 0 5
0 10 10
5 10 15
0 20 20
5 20 25
0 30 30
5 30 35
0 40 40
5 40 45
0 50 50
5 50 55
0 60 60
5 60 65
Chapter 9 229
Setup for Switching Uncertainty Measurement

1. Connect the equipment as indicated in Figure 9-8. The synthesized
signal generator provides the frequency reference for the analyzer.
The 10 dB fixed attenuator (or minimum loss pad for 75 Ω input
analyzers) should be connected directly to the analyzer’s input
connector.
2. Press Preset on the analyzer. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align,
Off. Set the controls as follows:
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, 100 kHz
AMPLITUDE, −1.2 dBmV (75 Ω Input only)
Attenuation, 10 dB
Scale/Div, 2 dB/
Video BW, 100 Hz

follows:
FREQUENCY, 50 MHz
AM OFF
FM OFF
4. Set the 1 dB step attenuator to 0 dB attenuation. Set the 10 dB step
attenuator to 50 dB. Refer to Table 9-2 earlier in this chapter for
information on manually controlling a programmable step
attenuator with an HP 11713A attenuator / switch driver.
analyzer’s marker amplitude reads −52 dBm ± 0.1 dB.
75 Ω Input only: Adjust the synthesized signal generator’s amplitude
until the analyzer’s marker reads −3.2 dBmV ± 0.1 dB.
7. On the analyzer, press Peak Search, Marker, Marker ∆.
reference is established.
230 Chapter 9
Table 9-12 Input Attenuation Switching Uncertainty Worksheet
Spectrum Analyzer Total TR Entry

Attenuation Mkr ∆
Nominal (Switching
Error Reading
Attenuation Reference Level Attenuation Error)
dB dBm dBmV dB dB dB dB
10 −50 −1.2 50 0 0 Ref
0 −60 −11.2 60 1
5 −55 −6.2 55 2
15 −45 +3.8 45 3
20 −40 +8.8 40 4
25 −35 +13.8 35 5
30 −30 +18.8 30 6
35 −25 +28.8 25 7
40 −20 +23.8 20 8
45 −15 +33.8 15 9
50 −10 +38.8 10 10
55 −5 +43.8 5 11
60 0 +48.8 0 12
Measure Switching Uncertainty

1. Set the 1 dB and 10 dB step attenuators for the total nominal
attenuation as indicated in Table 9-12 for the 0 dB spectrum
analyzer attenuation setting. Table 9-11 may be used as a reference
for setting the step attenuators to achieve the desired total nominal
attenuation.
2. Set the spectrum analyzer reference level as indicated in
Table 9-12 for the 0 dB spectrum analyzer attenuation setting.
For analyzers with 50 Ω inputs, use the column labeled “(dBm)”.
For analyzers with 75 Ω inputs, use the column labeled “(dBmV)”.
3. Set the spectrum analyzer attenuation to 0 dB.
4. Press Single Sweep and wait for completion of a new sweep.
5. Press Peak Search. Record the marker amplitude in Table 9-12 as the
Mkr ∆ Reading.
Chapter 9 231
6. Repeat steps 1 through 5 above for the remaining spectrum analyzer

attenuation settings listed in Table 9-12.
7. Calculate the Switching Error by subtracting the Attenuation Error
from the Mkr∆ Reading. Record the result in the performance
verification test record as indicated in the TR Entry column of
Table 9-12.
Switching Error = Mkr∆ Reading – Attentuation Error
Example:
Mkr∆ Reading = – 0.21 dB
Attenuation Error = 0.148 dB
Switching Error = – 0.21 dB – 0.148 dB

= – 0.358 dB
8. On the analyzer, press System, Alignments, Auto Align, All.
232 Chapter 9

The output of a synthesized signal generator is connected to the input
of the analyzer, characterized through a 1 dB step attenuator set to
3 dB.
The amplitude of the synthesized signal generator is set to a reference
amplitude 5 dB below top of screen. A marker reference is set and the
attenuator is set to 0 dB.
The analyzer’s markers are then used to measure the 3 dB bandwidth.
The first marker is set on the left filter skirt so that the marker delta
amplitude is 0 dB plus the attenuator error for the 3 dB setting. The
second marker is similarly set on the right filter skirt. The frequency
difference between the two markers is the 3 dB bandwidth.
There are no related adjustments for this performance test.
Equipment Required
Attenuator/switch driver (if programmable step attenuators are
used)

Pad, minimum loss
Chapter 9 233
Figure 9-9 Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy Test Setup

Procedure
3 dB Bandwidths
FREQUENCY, 50 MHz
finish. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off. Set the analyzer by
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, 4.5 MHz
BW/Avg, 3 MHz
Amplitude, Scale/Div 1 dB
234 Chapter 9
Amptd Units, dBm, Done
4. Set the step attenuator to 3 dB.

5. Press Search, Max PK→ CF on the analyzer.
6. Adjust the amplitude of the synthesized signal generator for a
marker amplitude reading of −5 dBm ± 0.2 dB.
7. Press Peak Search, Marker, Marker ∆ on the analyzer.
8. Set the attenuator to 0 dB. Note the attenuator error for the 3 dB
setting.
Attenuator Error (3 dB) ____________ dB
9. On the analyzer, press Marker. Lower the marker frequency by
adjusting the knob until the marker delta amplitude is 0 dB plus the
attenuator error noted in step 8 ± 0.05 dB.
10.Record the marker frequency readout in column 3 of Table 9-13.
11.Using the analyzer knob, raise the marker frequency so that the
marker delta amplitude is maximum. Continue increasing the
marker frequency until the marker reads 0.0 dB plus the attenuator
error noted in step 8 ± 0.05 dB.
12.Record the marker frequency readout in column 4 of Table 9-13.
13.Set the attenuator to 3 dB.
14.Press Marker, Marker Normal on the analyzer.
15.Repeat step 5 through step 14 for each of the Res BW and Span
settings listed in Table 9-13.
16.Subtract the lower marker frequency from the upper marker
frequency. Record the difference as the 3 dB bandwidth, in the
performance verification test record as indicated in Table 9-13.
3 dB Bandwidth = Upper Marker Frequency – Lower Marker Frequency
Chapter 9 235
Table 9-13 3 dB Resolution Bandwidth Accuracy
Analyzer Analyzer Lower Marker Upper Marker TR Entry

Span Res BW Frequency Frequency 3 dB Bandwidth
4.5 MHz 3 MHz 1
1.5MHz 1 MHz 2
450 kHz 300 kHz 3
150 kHz 100 kHz 4
45 kHz 30 kHz 5
15 kHz 10 kHz 6
4.5 kHz 3 kHz 7
1.5 kHz 1 kHz 8
236 Chapter 9
11. Frequency Readout and Marker Count

Accuracy
The frequency readout accuracy of the analyzer is tested with an input
signal of known frequency. By using the same frequency standard for
the analyzer and the synthesized sweeper, the frequency reference
error is eliminated.
There is no related adjustment for this performance test.
Equipment Required
Synthesized sweeper

Pad, minimum loss
Procedure
This performance test consists of two parts:
Part 1: Frequency Readout Accuracy
Part 2: Marker Count Accuracy
Perform Part 1 before Part 2.
Part 1: Frequency Readout Accuracy

1. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-10. Remember to
connect the 10 MHz REF OUT of the synthesized sweeper to the 10
MHz REF IN of the analyzer.
• Press INSTRUMENT PRESET on the synthesized sweeper, then set
the controls as follows:
CW, 1.490 GHz
• Press Preset on the analyzer, then wait for the preset routine to
Chapter 9 237
Frequency, 1.490 GHz
Span, 10 MHz
Figure 9-10 Frequency Readout Accuracy Test Setup

3. Press Peak Search on the analyzer to measure the frequency readout

accuracy.
4. Record the marker frequency reading in the performance verification
test record.
5. Change to the next analyzer span setting listed in Table 9-14.
6. Repeat step 3 through step 5 for each analyzer span setting listed in
Table 9-14.
‘‘Part 1: Frequency Readout Accuracy” is now complete. Continue with
“Part 2: Marker Count Accuracy.”
238 Chapter 9
Table 9-14 Frequency Readout Accuracy
Spectrum Analyzer TR Entry (Actual)
Res BW VBW Span
100 kHz 30 kHz 10 MHz 1
1 kHz 1 kHz 100 kHz 2
Part 2: Marker Count Accuracy

Perform “Part 1: Frequency Readout Accuracy” before performing this
procedure.
finish. Set the analyzer to measure the marker count accuracy by
Frequency, 1.490 GHz
Span, 10 MHz
Marker Count, Marker Count On Off (On)
Resolution Auto Man, 1 Hz
2. Press Peak Search, then wait for a count be taken (it may take
several seconds).
3. Record the center frequency reading as TR Entry 3 of the
Chapter 9 239
Absolute Amplitude Accuracy

The level of a 50 MHz signal is measured with a power meter. A
complete auto alignment is performed. The 50 MHz signal is then
measured with the spectrum analyzer. The difference between the
power meter and spectrum analyzer readings is calculated.
For analyzers with 75 Ω inputs, the minimum adapter’s insertion loss is
characterized using two power sensors and a power splitter. The
measured insertion loss is then used to correct the difference between
the power meter and spectrum analyzer readings.
Equipment Required
Measuring receiver
Power sensor, low power
Adapter, Type-N (f) to Type-N (f)

Power sensor, 100 kHz to 1500 MHz, 75 Ω
Adapter, mechanical, Type-N (f), 75 Ω to Type-N (m) 50 Ω
Pad, minimum loss
Procedure: Absolute Amplitude Accuracy

Measurement
1. On the synthesized signal generator set the controls as follows:
CW, 50 MHz
RF ON
AM OFF
FM OFF
240 Chapter 9
2. Calibrate the measuring receiver and low-power power sensor.

75 Ω Input: Calibrate the measuring receiver and 75 Ω power sensor.
3. Connect the signal generator output to the low-power power sensor
through the Type-N cable, using an adapter.
75 Ω Input: Connect the signal generator output to the 75 Ω power
sensor through the Type-N cable using minimum loss pad and other
adapters as necessary.
4. Adjust the signal generator’s power level for a power meter reading
of −27 dBm.
75 Ω Input: Adjust the signal generator’s power level for a power
meter reading of −24 dBm. Allow the power sensor adequate time to
settle; the 75 Ω power sensor is being used on its lowest range.
Record the power meter reading here.
Power Meter Reading ____________ dBm
5. Press the following analyzer keys:
Preset, System, Alignments, Align Now, All (wait for alignment to
finish), Done, Auto Align, Off.
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, 2 kHz
Video BW Auto Man 10 kHz
6. Press Amplitude −25 dBm, Atten Auto Man 10 dB, Scale Type Log Lin
(Lin).
75 Ω Input: Set the reference level to +26.76 dBmV.
7. Press Det/Demod, Detector, Sample, Done.
8. Disconnect the power sensor from the Type-N cable. Connect the
Type-N cable to the analyzer 50 Ω input.
75 Ω Input: Connect the Type-N cable to the analyzer 75 Ω input
using a minimum loss adapter.
Chapter 9 241
Figure 9-11 Absolute Amplitude Accuracy Test Setup
9. Press Peak Search.

10.Convert the marker amplitude reading from volts to dBm using the
following equation:
2
50Ω Input 10log ( Mkr ( V ⁄ 0.05 ) )
2
75Ω Input 10log ( Mkr ( V ⁄ 0.075 ) )
Mkr(dBm) ____________ dBm
11.Subtract the power meter reading noted in step 4 from the Mkr
amplitude reading in dBm. Record the difference in the performance
test record.
TR entry = Mkr (dBm) – power meter reading.
242 Chapter 9

The output of the synthesized signal generator is fed through a power
splitter to a power sensor and the spectrum analyzer. The synthesized
signal generator’s power level is adjusted at 50 MHz to place the
displayed signal at the spectrum analyzer center horizontal graticule
line. The measuring receiver, used as a power meter, is placed in RATIO
mode. At each new synthesized signal generator frequency and
spectrum analyzer center frequency setting, the synthesized signal
generator’s power level is adjusted to place the signal at the center
horizontal graticule line. The measuring receiver displays the inverse of
the frequency response relative to 50 MHz.
For frequencies below 100 kHz, a synthesizer/function generator is used
in place of the synthesized signal generator. A DVM and 50 Ω load are
used in place of the power sensor and measuring receiver.
The related adjustments for this performance test are “Corrected
Flatness” and “Uncorrected Flatness.”
Analyzers with 75 Ω inputs are tested only down to 1 MHz. Also, a
system flatness characterization is performed.
Equipment Required
Measuring receiver (used as a power meter)
Synthesizer/function generator
Power sensor, 100 kHz to 1800 MHz
Power splitter
Dual banana plug to BNC (f)
BNC tee (BNC f,m,f)
50 Ω termination BNC (m)
DVM HP3458, or HP34401A only
Chapter 9 243

Power meter
Power sensor, 75 Ω, 1 MHz to 1500 MHz
Adapter, mechanical, Type-N (f) 75 Ω to Type-N (m) 50 Ω
Adapter, Type-N (m), to BNC (m), 75 Ω

Figure 9-12 System Characterization Test Setup for 75 Ω Input.
Procedure, Part 1, System Characterization for

75 Ω Input
NOTE The following procedure is only for spectrum analyzers equipped with
75 Ω input. If your spectrum analyzer in not equipped with 75 Ω input
proceed with step 1 of “Frequency Response ≥100 kHz”.
1. Zero and calibrate the measuring receiver and 100 kHz to 1500 MHz
power sensor as described in the measuring receiver operation
manual.
2. Zero and calibrate the power meter and 75 Ω power sensor as
described in the power meter operation manual.
244 Chapter 9
Figure 9-13 Frequency Response Test Setup, ≥100 kHz

3. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-12. Be sure to use a

mechanical adapter on analyzers with 75 Ω inputs.
4. Press Blue Key, Special 00 on the synthesized signal generator. Set
the synthesized signal generator controls as follows:
FREQUENCY, 1 MHz
INCREMENT SET, 50 MHz

AMPLITUDE, 5 dBm
5. Adjust the synthesized signal generator amplitude for 0 dBm

reading on the measuring receiver.
6. Record the power meter reading in column 4 of Table 9-15, taking
into account the calibration factors of both the 100 kHz to 1500 MHz
power sensor and the 75 Ω power sensor.
7. On the synthesized signal generator, press FREQUENCY, 50 MHz.
8. Repeat step 5 and step 6, entering each power sensor’s calibration
factor into the respective power meter.
9. On the synthesized signal generator, press FREQUENCY, and ↑
(up-arrow key), to step through the remaining frequencies listed in
Table 9-15. (No measurement is made at 100 kHz).
Chapter 9 245
At each new frequency repeat step 5 and step 6, entering each power
sensor’s calibration factor into the respective power meter.
System characterization is now complete for spectrum analyzers
equipped with 75 Ω Input. Continue with “Procedure, Part 2,
Frequency Response, 100 kHz” below.
Procedure, Part 2, Frequency Response, ≥ 100 kHz

NOTE If your analyzer is equipped with a 75 Ω input, perform “Procedure for
system characterization for 75 Ω input” before proceeding with this
procedure.
power sensor in log mode as described in the measuring receiver
operation manual.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-12. Be sure to use a
mechanical adapter on analyzers with 75 Ω inputs.
3. Press Blue Key, Special 00 on the synthesized signal generator. Set
the synthesized signal generator controls as follows:
FREQUENCY, 50 MHz
INCREMENT SET, 50 MHz
AMPLITUDE, −8 dBm
4. On the analyzer, press Preset and wait for the preset routine to
Frequency, 50 MHz
CF Step Auto Man, 50 MHz
Span, 20 kHz
Amplitude, −10 dBm, Attenuation Auto Man 10 dB
Scale/Div, 1 dB
BW/Avg, 10 kHz
Peak Search
5. Adjust the synthesized signal generator amplitude for a marker

amplitude reading of −14 dBm ±0.10 dB.
6. Set the sensor Cal Factor on the measuring receiver, then press
RATIO.
246 Chapter 9
7. Set the synthesized signal generator frequency to 100 kHz.

75 Ω Input: Set frequency to 1 MHz.
8. Adjust the synthesized sweeper power level for a spectrum analyzer
marker amplitude reading of −14 dBm ±0.10 dB.
9. Press Frequency, 100 kHz on the spectrum analyzer.
75 Ω Input: Press, Frequency, 1 MHz
10.Set the sensor Cal Factor on the measuring receiver, then record the
negative of the power ratio displayed on the measuring receiver in
column 2 of Table 9-15 as the Error Relative to 50 MHz at 100 kHz.
75 Ω Input: Error relative to 50 MHz at 1 MHz.
11.Set the synthesized signal generator CW to 100 MHz.
12.Press FREQUENCY, 100 MHz on the spectrum analyzer.
13.Adjust the synthesized sweeper power level for a spectrum analyzer
marker amplitude reading of −14 dBm ±0.05 dB.
14.Set the sensor Cal Factor on the measuring receiver, then record the
negative of the power ratio displayed on the measuring receiver in
column 2 of Table 9-15 as the Error Relative to 50 MHz at 100 MHz.
15.On the synthesized signal generator, press FREQUENCY, and ↑
(step-up key), then on the spectrum analyzer, press Frequency, and ↑
(step-up key).
16.Repeat step 13 and step 14 for each new frequency, entering the
power sensor Cal Factor into the measuring receiver for each
frequency setting as indicated in Table 9-15.
17.This step applies only to analyzers with 75 Ω inputs.
In Table 9-15, starting with the error at 1 MHz, subtract column 4
(System Error) from column 2 (Error Relative to 50 MHz), and
record the result in column 5 as the Corrected Error.
Chapter 9 247
Figure 9-14 Frequency Response Test Setup, <100 kHz
Frequency Response, < 100 kHz

NOTE If your analyzer is equipped with 75 Ω Input, skip this section and go to
Test Results.
18.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-14.

Set the frequency synthesizer controls as follows:
FREQUENCY, 100 kHz
AMPLITUDE, −8 dBm
AMPTD INCR, 0.05 dB
19.Set the DVM as follows:

Function Sync AC Volts
Math dBm
RES Register 50 Ω
Front/Rear Terminals Front
Resolution 7.5 digits
20.On the analyzer, press the following keys:
Frequency, 100 kHz
248 Chapter 9
21.Adjust the frequency synthesizer amplitude until the spectrum

analyzer marker reads −14 dBm. This corresponds to the amplitude
at 100 kHz recorded in step 10. Record the DVM amplitude in
column 2 of Table 9-16 for DVM Amplitude at 100 kHz.
22.On the spectrum analyzer, press Peak Search, Marker, Marker ∆.
23.Set the spectrum analyzer and the frequency synthesizer to the next
frequency settings listed in Table 9-16.
24.At each frequency, adjust the frequency synthesizer amplitude for a
Sig-∆-Trk amplitude reading of 0.00 ±0.05 dB.
25.Record the DVM amplitude setting in column 2 of Table 9-16 as the
DVM amplitude.
26.Repeat step 23 through step 25 for each frequency setting listed in
Table 9-16.
27.For each of the frequencies in Table 9-16, subtract the DVM
Amplitude (column 2) from the DVM Amplitude at 100 kHz recorded
in step 21. Record the result as the Response Relative to 100 kHz
(column 3) of Table 9-16.
28.Add the entry from Table 9-15 column 2 (100 kHz Error Relative to
50 MHz) that was recorded in step 10, to each of the entries in Table
9-16 column 3 (Response Relative to 100 kHz). Record the results as
the Response Relative to 50 MHz (column 4) in Table 9-16.
Test Results
Perform the following steps to verify the frequency response of the
spectrum analyzer.
1. Enter the most positive number from Table 9-16, column 4:
____________ dB
If your analyzer is equipped with 75 Ω Input, no entry is necessary.
2. Enter the most positive number from Table 9-15, column 2:
____________ dB For 75 Ω Input use column 5.
3. Record the more positive of numbers from step 1 and step 2 in TR
Entry 1 of the performance verification test record.
4. Enter the most negative number from Table 9-16, column 4:
____________ dB
If your analyzer is equipped with 75 Ω Input, no entry is necessary.
5. Enter the most negative number from Table 9-15, column 2:
____________ dB For 75 Ω Input use column 5.
Chapter 9 249
6. Record the more negative of numbers from step 4 and step 5 in TR

Table 9-15 Frequency Response Errors Worksheet
Column 4 Column 5
Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
System Corrected
Analyzer Error Relative CAL FACTOR
Error (75 Ω Error (75 Ω
Frequency to 50 MHz Frequency
Input Only) Input Only)
(MHz) (dB) (GHz)
(dB) (dB)
100 kHz 0.0001
1 MHz 0.001
50 (Ref) 0.05 or Ref CF
100 0.1
150 0.1
200 0.3
250 0.3
300 0.3
350 0.3
400 0.3
450 0.3
500 0.3
550 1.0
600 1.0
650 1.0
700 1.0
750 1.0
800 1.0
850 1.0
900 1.0
950 1.0
1000 1.0
1050 1.0
1100 1.0
1150 1.0
250 Chapter 9
Column 4 Column 5
System Corrected
Analyzer Error Relative CAL FACTOR
Error (75 Ω Error (75 Ω
Frequency to 50 MHz Frequency
Input Only) Input Only)
(MHz) (dB) (GHz)
(dB) (dB)
1200 1.0
1250 1.0
1300 1.0
1350 1.0
1400 1.0
1450 1.0
1500 1.0
Table 9-16 Frequency Response, ≤100 kHz Worksheet

Column 1
DVM Response Response
Analyzer
Amplitude Relative to Relative to
Frequency
(dBm) 100 kHz 50 MHz
100 kHz 0 (Ref)
75 kHz
50 kHz
20 kHz
9 kHz
Chapter 9 251

This test is performed in two parts. Part 1 measures second harmonic
distortion; Part 2 measures third order intermodulation distortion.
To test second harmonic distortion, a 50 MHz low pass filter is used to
filter the source output, ensuring that harmonics read by the spectrum
analyzer are internally generated and not coming from the source. To
measure the distortion products, the power at the mixer is set 25 dB
higher than specified. New test limits have been developed based on
this higher power.
With −40 dBm at the input mixer and the distortion products
suppressed by 75 dBc, the equivalent Second Harmonic Intercept (SHI)
is +35 dBm (−40 dBm + 75 dBc). Therefore, with −20 dBm at the mixer,
and the distortion products suppressed by 55 dBc, the equivalent SHI is
also +35 dBm (−20 dBm + 55 dBc).
For third order intermodulation distortion, two signals are combined in
a directional bridge (for isolation) and are applied to the spectrum
analyzer input. The power level of the two signals is several dB higher
than specified, so the distortion products will be suppressed less than
the amount specified. In this manner, the equivalent third order
intercept (TOI) is measured.
With two −30 dBm signals at the input mixer and the distortion
products suppressed by 74 dBc, the equivalent TOI is +7 dBm
(−30 dBm + 74 dBc/2). However, if two −22 dBm signals are present at
the input mixer and the distortion products are suppressed by 58 dBc,
the equivalent TOI is also +7 dBm (−22 dBm + 58 dBc/2).
Performing the test with a higher power level maintains the
measurement integrity while reducing both test time and the
dependency upon the source’s noise sidebands (phase noise)
performance. This test therefore measures the equivalent TOI.
Equipment Required
Synthesized sweeper
50 MHz low pass filter
1 GHz low pass filter
6 GHz Directional bridge
252 Chapter 9
Cable, SMA, 61-cm (24-in) (2 required)

Adapter, Type-N (m) to SMA (f) (4 required)
Adapter, Type-N (m) to BNC (f)
Adapter, SMA (m) to Type-N (m)

Power sensor, 75 Ω
Adapter, mechanical, 75 Ω to 50 Ω
Pad, minimum loss
Adapter, Type-N (m), to BNC (m), 75 Ω
Procedure
This performance test consists of two parts:
Part 1: Second Harmonic Distortion, 40 MHz
Part 2: Third Order Intermodulation Distortion
Perform Part 1 before Part 2.
Chapter 9 253
Part 1: Second Harmonic Distortion, 40 MHz

Figure 9-15 Second Harmonic Distortion Test Setup, 40 MHz


FREQUENCY, 40 MHz
AMPLITUDE, −4.3 dBm (75 Ω Input only)

75 Ω Input only: Connect the minimum loss adapter between the LPF
and Input 75 Ω.
3. Press Preset on the spectrum analyzer, then wait for the preset
routine to finish. Set the spectrum analyzer by pressing the
following keys:
Frequency, 40 MHz
Span, 1 MHz
254 Chapter 9
Amplitude, +44 dBmV (75 Ω Input only)
Attenuation Auto Man 10 dB
BW/Avg, 30 kHz
4. Adjust the synthesized signal generator amplitude to place the peak

of the signal at the reference level.
5. Set the spectrum analyzer control as follows:
Span, 50 kHz
BW/Avg, 1 kHz
6. Wait for two sweeps to finish, then press the following spectrum
analyzer keys:
Search
More
Mkr → CF Step
Marker, Marker ∆
Frequency.
7. Press the ↑ (step-up key) on the spectrum analyzer to step to the

second harmonic (at 80 MHz). Press Peak Search. Record the marker
delta amplitude reading in the performance verification test record
as TR Entry 1.
Part 2: Third Order Intermodulation Distortion

power sensor in log mode (power reads out in dBm), as described in
the measuring receiver operation manual. Enter the power sensor’s
50 MHz Cal Factor into the measuring receiver.
75 Ω Input only: Use a 75 Ω power sensor.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-16 using the 50 MHz
low pass filter and with the output of the directional bridge
connected to the power sensor.
75 Ω Input only: Use the power sensor with a 50 Ω to 75 Ω mechanical
adapter in place of the 50 Ω adapter.
The power measured at the output of the 50 Ω directional bridge by
the 75 Ω power sensor is the equivalent power “seen” by the 75 Ω
analyzer.
Chapter 9 255
Figure 9-16 Third Order Intermodulation Distortion Test Setup

3. Proceed with steps 4 through 25 using the information and entries in

Table 9-17 for TOI Test 1. Then continue on with steps 26 through
30.
4. Set the synthesized signal generator’s FREQUENCY to F1 as
indicated in Table 9-17. Set the AMPLITUDE to −10 dBm.
256 Chapter 9
5. Press PRESET on the synthesized sweeper. Set the sweeper’s CW

frequency to F2 as indicated in Table 9-17. Set the synthesized
sweeper controls as follows:
POWER LEVEL, +4 dBm
RF, Off
6. On the spectrum analyzer, press PRESET, then wait until the preset
routine is finished. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off. Press
Frequency and set the analyzer’s Center Freq to F1 as indicated in
Table 9-17. Press the following keys on the spectrum analyzer:
Frequency, CF Step Auto Man, 50 kHz
Span, 20 kHz
Ref Level, −15 dBm
Attenuation Auto Man 10 dB
BW/Avg, Video BW Auto Man, 300 Hz
Search, Peak Excursn, 3 dB
7. On the synthesized signal generator, adjust the amplitude until the

measuring receiver reads −12 dBm ±0.1 dB.
8. Disconnect the power sensor from the directional bridge. Connect
the directional bridge directly to the spectrum analyzer RF Input
using an adapter (do not use a cable).
75 Ω Input only: Use a 50 Ω to 75 Ω mechanical adapter and a 75 Ω
Type N (m) to BNC (m) adapter.
CAUTION Support the directional bridge and low pass filter to minimize stress on
the spectrum analyzer’s input connector.
9. In the following steps, the two input tones will be approximately 3

dB above the reference level and will appear “clipped”. The marker
readings are still accurate, however. On the spectrum analyzer, press
the following keys:
Peak Search
Search, Mkr → CF
Marker, Marker∆
Frequency ↑
10.On the synthesized sweeper, set the RF ON.

11.Press Peak Search on the spectrum analyzer.
Chapter 9 257
12.Adjust the power level until the Mkr∆ amplitude reads 0 dB

±0.05 dB.
13.On the spectrum analyzer, press Frequency, ↓, ↓. This sets the center
frequency to the frequency of the lower distortion product.
14.On the spectrum analyzer, Press BW/Avg, Video Average, 20, Enter.
Wait for “Avg 20” to appear along the left side of the display.
15.On the spectrum analyzer, press Peak Search and record the marker
amplitude reading in Table 9-17 as the Lower Distortion Amplitude.
16.On the spectrum analyzer, press Frequency, ↑, ↑, ↑. This sets the
center frequency to the frequency of the upper distortion product.
Press BW/Avg, Video Average Off.
17.Set the signal generator’s FREQUENCY to F2 as indicated in
Table 9-17.
18.Set the synthesized sweeper’s CW frequency to F1 as indicated in
Table 9-17.
19.On the spectrum analyzer, Press BW/Avg, Video Average, 20, Enter.
Wait for “Avg 20” to appear along the left side of the display.
20.On the spectrum analyzer, press Peak Search and record the marker
amplitude reading in Table 9-17 as the Upper Distortion Amplitude.
21.On the spectrum analyzer, press BW/Avg, Video Average Off, Marker,
Marker All Off.
22.In Table 9-17, record the most positive of the Upper Distortion
Amplitude and Lower Distortion Amplitude as the Worst Distortion
Amplitude. For example, if the Upper Distortion Amplitude is
−72 dBc, and the Lower Distortion Amplitude is −73 dBc, record
−72 dBc as the Worst Distortion Amplitude.
23.If the analyzer has a 50 Ω input, enter −22 dBm as the Mixer Level
in Table 9-17. The mixer level is the input level minus the analyzer’s
input attenuation. If the analyzer has a 75 Ω input, enter
+26.76 dBmV as the Mixer Level in Table 9-17.
24.Calculate the equivalent TOI by subtracting one-half of the Worst
Distortion Amplitude (in dB) from the Mixer Level (in dBm or
dBmV). For example, if the Worst Distortion Amplitude is −72 dBc,
and the Mixer Level is −22 dBm, the TOI would be:
TOI = – 22 dBm – ( – 72 dB ⁄ 2 ) = – 22 dBm + 36 dB = 14 dBm

25.If the analyzer has a 50 Ω input, record the calculated TOI in the
performance verification test record as indicated in TR Entry 50 Ω in
Table 9-17. If the analyzer has a 75 Ω input, record the calculated
TOI in the performance verification test record as indicated in
TR Entry 75 Ω in Table 9-17.
258 Chapter 9
Table 9-17 Third Order Intercept (TOI) Worksheet
Lower Upper Worst TR TR

TOI F1 F2 Mixer
Distortion Distortion Distortion Entry Entry
Test (MHz) (MHz) Level
Amplitude Amplitude Amplitude 50 Ω 75 Ω
1 50 50.05 2 5
2 900 900.05 3 6
3 1450 1450.05 4 7
26.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-16 using the 1 GHz low
pass filter and with the output of the directional bridge connected to
the power sensor.
27.Repeat steps 4 through 25 using the information and entries for TOI
Test 2 in Table 9-17. It is not necessary to preset the synthesized
sweeper and spectrum analyzer.
28.Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-16 without using a low
pass filter and with the output of the directional bridge connected to
the power sensor.
29.Repeat steps 4 through 25 using the information and entries for TOI
Test 3 in Table 9-17. It is not necessary to preset the synthesized
sweeper and spectrum analyzer.
30.On the spectrum analyzer, press Preset, System, Alignments,
Auto Align, All.
Chapter 9 259

Gain compression is measured by applying two signals, separated by
3 MHz. First, the test places a −26 dBm signal at the input of the
spectrum analyzer (the spectrum analyzer reference level is set to
−10 dBm). Then, a 0 dBm signal (46.75 dBmV for 75 Ω) is applied to the
spectrum analyzer, overdriving its input. The decrease in the first
signal’s amplitude (gain compression) caused by the second signal is the
measured gain compression.
Equipment Required
Synthesized sweeper
Directional bridge
Adapter, Type-N (f) to BNC (m)
Adapter, Type-N (m) to BNC (m)

Adapter, BNC (m), to BNC (m), 75 Ω
Procedure
power sensor combination in log mode (power reads out in dBm) as
described in the measuring receiver operation manual. Enter the
power sensor’s 50 MHz Cal Factor into the measuring receiver.
75 Ω Input only: Calibrate the 75 Ω power sensor.
2. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-17, with the load port
of the directional bridge connected to the power sensor.
260 Chapter 9
75 Ω Input only: Use the power sensor with a Type-N (f) to BNC (m)
75 Ω adapter and a BNC (m) to BNC (m) adapter. The power
measured at the output of the 50 Ω directional bridge by the 75 Ω
power sensor is the equivalent power “seen” by the 75 Ω analyzer.
Figure 9-17 Gain Compression Test Setup

3. Press PRESET on the synthesized sweeper, then set the controls as

follows:
CW, 53 MHz
POWER LEVEL, 6 dBm

FREQUENCY, 50 MHz
AMPLITUDE, −100 dBm
5. On the spectrum analyzer, press Preset, then wait for the preset
routine to finish. Press System, Alignments, Auto Align, Off. Press the
spectrum analyzer keys as follows:
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, 2 MHz
Chapter 9 261
Amplitude, −10 dBm, Attenuation Auto Man 0 dB
Scale/Div, 2 dB
BW/Avg, 30 kHz
6. On the synthesized sweeper, adjust the power level for a 0 dBm

reading on the measuring receiver. Set RF to Off.
75 Ω Input only: Adjust the power level for a −2.0 dBm reading.
7. On the synthesized signal generator, set the amplitude to −14 dBm.
8. Disconnect the power sensor from the directional bridge and connect
the directional bridge to the Input 50 Ω connector of the spectrum
analyzer using an adapter. Do not use a cable.
75 Ω Input only: Use a 75 Ω adapter, BNC (m) to BNC (m).
9. On the spectrum analyzer, press the following keys:
Peak Search
Span, 150 kHz
Wait for the Span 150 kHz message to appear.

10.On the synthesized signal generator, adjust the amplitude to place
the signal 16 dB below the spectrum analyzer reference level.
11.On the spectrum analyzer, press Peak Search, then Marker, Marker ∆.
12.On the synthesized sweeper, set RF to On.
13.On the spectrum analyzer, press Search.
14.Read the marker delta amplitude and record its absolute value in
the performance verification test record as TR Entry 1.
15.On the spectrum analyzer, press System, Alignments, Auto Align, On.
262 Chapter 9
16. Other Input Related Spurious

Responses
A synthesized source and the spectrum analyzer are set to the same
frequency and the amplitude of the source is set to −10 dBm. A
marker-amplitude reference is set on the spectrum analyzer. The source
is then tuned to several different frequencies where image responses
could occur. At each source frequency, the source amplitude is set to
−10 dBm and the amplitude of the response, if any, is measured using
the spectrum analyzer marker function. The marker-amplitude
difference is then compared to the specification.
Equipment Required
Synthesized sweeper
Adapter, Type-N (f) to Type-N (f)

Adapter, BNC (m), to BNC (m), 75 Ω
Pad, minimum loss
Procedure
75 Ω Input only: Use a 75 Ω power sensor.
2. Press INSTRUMENT PRESET on the synthesized sweeper and set the
controls as follows:
CW, 542.8 MHz
Chapter 9 263
3. Connect the equipment as shown in Figure 9-18. Connect the output

of the synthesizer to the 100 kHz to 1500 MHz power sensor using
adapters.
75 Ω Input only: Use the minimum loss pad and 75 Ω adapters to
connect to the 75 Ω power sensor.
4. Adjust the synthesized sweeper power level for a −10 dBm ±0.1 dB
75 Ω Input only: Adjust the synthesized sweeper for a power level of
−4.24 dBm reading ±0.1 dB.
5. On the synthesized sweeper, press SAVE, 1.
Figure 9-18 Other Input Related Spurious Responses Power Setting Setup
6. Set the CW frequency on the synthesized sweeper to 510.7 MHz.

7. Adjust the synthesized sweeper power level for a −10 dBm ±0.1 dB
8. On the synthesized sweeper, press SAVE 2.
9. Enter the power sensors Cal Factor for 1 GHz into the measuring
receiver.
10.Set the CW frequency on the synthesized sweeper to 1310.7 MHz.
11.Adjust the synthesized sweeper power level for a −10 dBm ±0.1 dB
264 Chapter 9

12.On the synthesized sweeper, press SAVE 3.
13.Enter the power sensors Cal Factor for 100 MHz into the measuring
receiver.
14.Set the CW frequency on the synthesized sweeper to 100 MHz.
16.On the synthesized sweeper, press SAVE 4.
17.Set the CW frequency on the synthesized sweeper to 500 MHz.
19.Connect the synthesized sweeper to the RF Input of the spectrum
analyzer using the appropriate cable and adapters. See Figure 9-19.
75 Ω Input only: Use the minimum loss pad and a 75 Ω adapter as
shown in Figure 9-19.
Figure 9-19 Other Input Related Spurious Responses Measurement Setup
Chapter 9 265
20.On the analyzer, press Preset, then wait for the preset routine to
Frequency, 500 MHz
Span, 10 MHz
Amplitude, Attenuation Auto Man, 10 dB
Peak Search
Span, 200 kHz
Wait for the Span 200 kHz message to disappear. Press the
following analyzer keys:
Search, Mkr → Ref Lvl
Peak Search, Marker, Marker ∆
Single Sweep
21.For the first two frequencies listed in Table 9-18, do the following:
a. Set the synthesized sweeper to the listed CW frequency by
pressing RECALL, 1 for a CW frequency of 542.8 MHz or RECALL,
2 for a CW frequency of 510.7 MHz.
b. Press Single Sweep and wait for the completion of a new sweep.
c. On the analyzer, press Peak Search and record the marker delta
amplitude reading in the performance verification test record as
indicated in Table 9-18.
Table 9-18 Spurious Responses
Synthesized Sweeper CW
TR Entry (Mkr ∆)
Frequency
542.8 MHz 1
510.7 MHz 2
1310.7 MHz 3
22.On the synthesized sweeper, press RECALL 4

23.On the analyzer press the following keys:
Frequency, 100 MHz
Amplitude, + 48.76 dBmV (75 Ω Input only)
266 Chapter 9
Peak Search
Marker, Marker Normal
Search, Mkr → Ref Lvl
Peak Search
Marker, Marker ∆
Single Sweep
24.On the synthesized sweeper, press RECALL 3 for a CW frequency of

1310.7 MHz
25.Press Single Sweep on the analyzer and wait for a completion of a
new sweep.
26.On the analyzer, press Peak Search and record the marker delta
amplitude in the performance test record as TR Entry 3.
Chapter 9 267

This test uses a synthesizer/function generator to amplitude modulate
a 500 MHz CW signal from another signal generator. The analyzer
demodulates this signal in zero span to display the response in the time
domain. The marker delta frequency function on the analyzer is used to
read out the sweep time accuracy.
Equipment Required
Synthesizer/function generator

Pad, minimum loss
Figure 9-20 Sweep Time Accuracy Test Setup
268 Chapter 9

Procedure
1. Set the synthesized signal generator to output a 500 MHz, −10 dBm,
CW signal. Set the AM and FM controls to off.
75 Ω Input only: Set output level to −4 dBm.
2. Set the synthesizer/function generator to output a 500 Hz, +5 dBm
triangle waveform signal.
Frequency, 500 MHz
Span, Span Zoom, 50 kHz
Wait for the Span 50 kHz message to appear. Press Span, then Zero
Span.
Press the following analyzer keys:

BW/Avg, 3 MHz
Sweep/Time, 20 ms
Amplitude, Scale Type Log Lin (Lin)
Search, Peak Excursion, 3 dB
Adjust the signal generator amplitude for a mid-screen display.

5. Set the synthesized signal generator to EXT AM, 90%
MODULATION.
6. On the analyzer, press Trig then Video. Adjust the video trigger so
that the analyzer is sweeping.
7. Press Single Sweep. After the completion of the sweep, press Peak
Search, Search. If necessary, press Next Pk Left until the marker is on
the left-most signal. This is the “marked signal.”
8. Press Marker, Marker ∆, then Search and press Next Pk Right 8 times so
the marker delta is on the eighth signal peak from the “marked
signal.”
Record the marker delta reading in the performance verification test
record.
9. Repeat step 7 through step 9 for the remaining sweep time settings
listed in Table 9-19.
Chapter 9 269
Table 9-19 Sweep Time Accuracy
Spectrum Analyzer
Synthesizer/Function TR Entry
Sweep Time
Generator Frequency (MKR ∆)
Setting
20 ms 500.0 Hz 1
100 ms 100.0 Hz 2
1s 10.0 Hz 3
10 s 1.0 Hz 4
270 Chapter 9

This performance test measures the displayed average noise level
within the frequency range specified. The analyzer input is terminated
in 50 Ω..
The test tunes the analyzer frequency across the band, uses the marker
to locate the frequency with the highest response, and then reads the
average noise in zero span.
To reduce measurement uncertainty due to input attenuator switching
and resolution bandwidth switching, a reference level offset is added.
The 50 MHz alignment signal is used as the amplitude reference for
determining the amount of offset required. The offset is removed at the
end of the test by pressing instrument preset.
The related adjustment for this procedure is “Frequency Response
Adjustment.”
Equipment Required
Termination, 50 Ω, Type-N (m)

Termination, 75 Ω Type-N (m)
Figure 9-21 Displayed Average Noise Level Test Setup
Chapter 9 271

Procedure
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, 2 kHz
Amplitude, +26.76 dBmV (75 Ω Input only)
BW/Avg, 3 kHz
Video BW Auto Man 10 kHz
Det/Demod, Detector, Sample, Done
2. Press Single Sweep and wait for a new sweep to complete.

3. Press Peak Search and record the marker amplitude reading.
Ref Amptd ____________ dB
4. Press the following keys on the analyzer:
Amplitude, Attenuation Auto Man 0 dB
Scale Type Log Lin (Log)
BW/Avg, 1 kHz
Video BW, 30 Hz
Single Sweep

Meas Amptd ____________ dB
6. Calculate the necessary reference level offset by subtracting the
Meas Amptd in step 5 from the Ref Amptd in step 3. If the calculated
Ref Lvl Offst is greater that +0.05 dB or less than –0.05 dB, record
the Ref Lvl Offst value below. Otherwise, enter 0.
272 Chapter 9
Ref Lvl Offst = Ref Amptd – Meas Amptd
Ref Lvl Offst ____________ dB

7. Press System, 50 MHz osc On Off (Off), then Amplitude, Ref Lvl Offst,
and enter the value recorded in step 6.
75 Ω Input only: Press Amplitude, Amptd Units, dBm, Done
8. Connect the 50 Ω termination to the analyzer input as shown in
Figure 9-21.
75 Ω Input only: Use the 75 Ω termination.
400 kHz
If testing an analyzer with a 75 Ω input, skip step 9 through step 11 and
proceed to step 12 “1 MHz to 10 MHz”.
9. Press Frequency, 400 kHz. Set the analyzer by pressing the following
keys:
Span, 50 kHz
BW/Avg, 1 kHz
Sweep, Sweep Time Auto Man, 5 sec
Det/Demod, Detector, Sample
Single Sweep
Wait for the completion of a new sweep.

10.Press the following analyzer keys:
Display, Display Line On Off (On)
Adjust the display line so that it is centered on the average trace

noise, ignoring any residual responses (refer to the Residual
Responses verification test for any suspect residuals).
11.Record the display line amplitude setting as TR Entry 1 of the
performance verification test record as the noise level at 400 kHz.
The average noise level should be less than the specified limit.
Chapter 9 273
1 MHz to 10 MHz
Frequency, Start Freq, 1 MHz
Stop Freq, 10 MHz
Amplitude, Amptd Units, dBmV, Done, Ref Level, −21.24 dBmV

(75 Ω Input only)
BW/Avg, 100 kHz
Sweep Time Auto Man (Auto)
13.Press Frequency and adjust the start frequency setting, if necessary,

to place the LO feedthrough just off-screen to the left.
Single Sweep
Trace, Clear Write A
BW/Avg, Video Average On Off (On), 10, Enter
Single Sweep
Wait until AVG 10 is displayed to the left of the graticule (the

analyzer will take ten sweeps, then stop).
15.Press Peak Search and record the marker frequency as the
Measurement Frequency in Table 9-20 for 1 MHz to 10 MHz.
BW/Avg, Video Average On Off (Off)
BW/Avg, Resolution BW Auto Man (Auto)
Video BW Auto Man (Auto)
Span, 50 kHz
Frequency
17.Set the center frequency to the Measurement Frequency recorded in

Table 9-20 for 1 MHz to 10 MHz.
274 Chapter 9

BW/Avg, 1 kHz
Single Sweep
Wait for the sweep to finish.


performance verification test record. The average noise level should
be less than the specified limit. 75 Ω Input: TR Entry 6.
10 MHz to 500 MHz

Stop Freq, 500 MHz
Amplitude, Amptd Units, dBmV, Done, Ref Level, −21.24 dBmV

(75 Ω Input only)
BW/Avg, 100 kHz

Sweep Time Auto Man (Auto)
22.Press Frequency and adjust the start frequency setting, if necessary,

to place the LO feedthrough just off-screen to the left.
Single Sweep
Single Sweep

Chapter 9 275

Measurement Frequency in Table 9-20 for 10 MHz to 500 MHz.
Span, 50 kHz
Frequency

Table 9-20 for 10 MHz to 500 MHz.
BW/Avg, 1 kHz
Single Sweep


be less than the specified limit. 75 Ω Input: TR Entry 7.
Table 9-20 Displayed Average Noise Level Worksheet
Measurement TR Entry (Displayed

Frequency Range
Frequency Average Noise Level)
75 Ω Input 50 Ω Input 50 Ω Input 75 Ω Input
400 kHz 400 kHz 1
1 MHz to 10 MHz 1 MHz to 10 MHz 2 6
10 MHz to 500 MHz 10 MHz to 500 MHz 3 7
500 MHz to 1.0 GHz 500 MHz to 1.2 GHz 4 8
1.0 GHz to 1.5 GHz 1.2 GHz to 1.5 GHz 5 9
276 Chapter 9
500 MHz to 1.2 GHz (75 Ω Inputs: 500 MHz to

1.0 GHz)
Stop Freq, 1.2 GHz (50 Ω Input only)
Stop Freq, 1.0 GHz (75 Ω Input only)
BW/Avg, 1 MHz

Single Sweep
Single Sweep

Measurement Frequency in Table 9-20 for 500 MHz to 1.2 GHz.
75 Ω Input: 500 MHz to 1.0 GHz.

Span, 50 kHz
Frequency

Table 9-20 for 500 MHz to 1.2 GHz.
75 Ω Input: 500 MHz to 1.0 GHz.
BW/Avg, 1 kHz
Single Sweep
Chapter 9 277


be less than the specified limit.
75 Ω Input: TR Entry 8.
1.2 GHz to 1.5 GHz (75 Ω Inputs: 1.0 GHz to

1.5 GHz)
Frequency, Start Freq, 1.2 GHz
Frequency, Start Freq, 1.0 GHz (75 Ω Input only)
Stop Freq, 1.5 GHz
BW/Avg, 1 MHz

Single Sweep

Single Sweep

Measurement Frequency in Table 9-20 for 1.2 GHz to 1.5 GHz.
75 Ω Input: 1.0 GHz to 1.5 GHz.
Span, 50 kHz
278 Chapter 9
Frequency

Table 9-20 for 1.2 GHz to 1.5 GHz.
75 Ω Input: 1.0 GHz to 1.5 GHz.
BW/Avg, 1 kHz
Single Sweep


be less than the specified limit.
75 Ω Input: TR Entry 9.
Chapter 9 279

The analyzer input is terminated and the analyzer is swept from
150 kHz to 1 MHz. Then the analyzer is swept in 10 MHz spans
throughout the 1 MHz to 1.5 GHz range. Any responses above the
specification are noted.
Equipment Required
Termination, 50 Ω, Type-N (m)

Termination, 75 Ω Type−Ν (µ)
Figure 9-22 Residual Response Test Setup

280 Chapter 9
Procedure
150 kHz to 1 MHz

1. Connect the 50 Ω termination to the analyzer input as shown in
Figure 9-22.
75 Ω Input only: Use the adapter and the 75 Ω termination and
proceed with step 4.
2. Press Preset. Set the analyzer by pressing the following keys:
Frequency, Start Freq, 150 kHz
Stop Freq, 1 MHz
BW/Avg, 3 kHz
Display, Display Line On Off (On), −90 dBm
3. Press Single Sweep and wait for a new sweep to finish. Look for any
residual responses at or above the display line.
If a residual is suspected, press Single Sweep again. A residual
response will persist on successive sweeps, but a noise peak will not.
Note the frequency and amplitude of any residual responses above
the display line in Table 9-21.
1 MHz to 1.5 GHz

finish. Press the following keys:
Frequency, 5 MHz
Span, 10 MHz
Amplitude, −11.2 dBmV (75 Ω Input)
5. Press Frequency, then adjust the center frequency until the LO

feedthrough (the “signal” near the left of the screen) is just off the
left-most vertical graticule line. Press the following analyzer keys:
Frequency, CF Step Auto Man, 9.8 MHz
BW/Avg, 10 kHz
Chapter 9 281
Display, Display Line On Off (On), −90 dBm
Display, Display Line On Off (On), −36 dBmV (75 Ω Input)
6. Press Single Sweep and wait for a new sweep to finish. Look for any
residual responses at or above the display line. If a residual is
suspected, press Single Sweep again. A residual response will persist
on successive sweeps, but a noise peak will not. Note the frequency
and amplitude of any residual responses above the display line in
Table 9-21.
7. Press Frequency, ↑ (step-up key), to step to the next frequency and
repeat step 6.
8. Repeat step 7 until the range from 1 MHz to 1.5 GHz has been
checked. (This requires 153 additional frequency steps.) The test for
this band requires about 8 minutes to complete if no residuals are
found. If the on screen annotation is obscuring possible residuals,
just press the ESC key to clear it.
If there are any residuals at or near the frequency specification limits
(1 MHz or 1.5 GHz), it is recommended that a known frequency source
be used as a frequency marker. This will ensure that testing is done at
or below the specification limits.
9. Record the highest residual from Table 9-21 as TR Entry 1 in the
performance verification test record. If no residuals are found, then
record “N/A” in the performance verification test record.
Table 9-21 Residual Responses above Display Line Worksheet
Frequency (MHz) Amplitude (dBm or dBmV)
282 Chapter 9
20. Tracking Generator Feedthrough

Options IDN and IDQ
The tracking generator output is terminated and set for 0 dBm output
power (maximum output power). The analyzer input is also terminated.
The noise level of the analyzer is then measured at several frequencies.
Equipment Required
Termination, 50 Ω, Type-N (m) (2 required)
Additional Equipment Required For 75 Ω RF Out

Termination, 75 Ω,Type-N (m), (2 required)
Adapter, Type-N (m) to BNC (m), (2 required)

connectors or damage to the connectors will occur.
Figure 9-23 Tracking Generator Feedthrough Test Setup
Procedure
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, 2 kHz
Chapter 9 283
Amplitude, −25 dBm (50 Ω RF Output only)
Amplitude, +26.76 dBmV (75 Ω RF Output only)
BW/Avg, 3 kHz
Det/Demod, Detector, Sample, Done
2. Press Single Sweep and wait for a new sweep to complete.

Ref Amptd ____________ dBm
4. Press the following keys on the analyzer:
Amplitude, Attenuation Auto Man 0 dB
Scale Type Log Lin (Log)
BW/Avg, 1 kHz
Video BW, 30 Hz
Single Sweep

Meas Amptd ____________ dBm
6. Calculate the necessary reference level offset by subtracting the
Meas Amptd in step 5 from the Ref Amptd in step 3. If the calculated
Ref Lvl Offst is greater than +0.05 dB or less than –0.05 dB, record
the Ref Lvl Offst value below. Otherwise, enter 0.
Ref Lvl Offst ____________ dB
Ref Lvl Offst = Ref Amptd – Meas Amptd
7. Press System, 50 MHz osc On Off (Off), then Amplitude, Ref Lvl Offst,
and enter the value recorded in step 6.
8. Connect one 50 Ω termination to the analyzer Input 50 Ω and
another to the tracking generator’s RF Out 50 Ω.
75 Ω RF Out only: Connect one 75 Ω termination to the analyzer
Input 75 Ω using an adapter and another to the tracking generator’s
RF Out 75 Ω using an adapter.
284 Chapter 9
Frequency, 400 kHz (50 Ω RF Output only)
Frequency, 1 MHz (75 Ω RF Output only)
Span 0 Hz
Amplitude, −70 dBm (50 Ω RF Output only)
Amplitude, Amptd Units, dBmV, Done (75 Ω RF Output only)
Amplitude, −21.24 dBmV (75 Ω RF Output only)
Marker, Marker All Off

Source Amptd, Amplitude On Off 0 dBm (50 Ω RF Output only)
Source Amptd, Amplitude On Off +42.76 dBmV (75 Ω RF Output

only)
11.Press Single Sweep, then wait for completion of a new sweep. Press
12.Adjust the display line so that it is centered on the average trace

noise, ignoring any residual responses. Record the display line
amplitude setting in Table 9-22 as the noise level at 400 kHz.
75 Ω RF Out only: Record the display line amplitude setting in Table
9-22 as the noise level at 1 MHz.
13.Press Frequency, Center Freq, and enter the next frequency in Table
9-22. The center frequency of the analyzer equals the output
frequency of the tracking generator.
75 Ω RF Out only: Do not set the tracking generator RF Out to
frequencies below 1 MHz.
14.Repeat step 11 through step 13 for the remaining Tracking
Generator Output Frequencies (spectrum analyzer center
frequencies) listed in Table 9-22.
75 Ω RF Out only: Do not set the tracking generator RF Out to
frequencies below 1 MHz.
75 Ω RF Out only: Skip to step 19.
15.In Table 9-22, locate the most positive Noise Level Amplitude for
output frequencies less than or equal to 1 MHz. Record this
amplitude as TR Entry 1 of the performance verification test record.
Chapter 9 285
Table 9-22 TG Feedthrough Worksheet
Tracking
Noise Level
Generator
Amplitude
Output
(dBm or dBmV)
Frequency
400 kHz a
1 MHz
20 MHz
50 MHz
100 MHz
250 MHz
400 MHz
500 MHz
700 MHz
850 MHz
1000 MHz
1200 MHz
1300 MHz
1450 MHz
1500 MHz
a. This frequency does not apply to

analyzers with 75 Ω tracking
generators
frequencies greater than 1 MHz and less than or equal to 500 MHz.
Record this amplitude as TR Entry 2 of the performance verification
test record.
frequencies greater than 500 MHz and less than or equal to
1200 MHz. Record this amplitude as TR Entry 3 of the performance
verification test record.
frequencies greater than 1200 MHz. Record this amplitude as TR
286 Chapter 9
NOTE The following steps apply only to analyzers with 75 Ω RF Out.
frequencies between 1 MHz and 500 MHz. Record this amplitude as
TR Entry 5 of the performance verification test record.
frequencies greater than 500 MHz and less than or equal to
1000 MHz. Record this amplitude as TR Entry 6 of the performance
verification test record.
frequencies greater than 1000 MHz. Record this amplitude as TR
Chapter 9 287
21. Absolute Amplitude, Vernier, and Power Sweep Accuracy, Options 1DN and 1DQ
21. Absolute Amplitude, Vernier, and Power

Sweep Accuracy, Options 1DN and 1DQ
A calibrated power sensor is connected to the tracking generator output
to measure the power level at 50 MHz.
The measuring receiver is set for RATIO mode so that future power
level readings are in dB relative to the power level at 0 dBm. The
output power level setting is decreased in 1 dB steps and the power
level is measured at each step. The difference between the ideal and
actual power levels is calculated at each step.
Since a power sweep is accomplished by stepping through the vernier
settings, the peak-to-peak variation of the vernier accuracy is equal to
the power sweep accuracy.
Equipment Required
Measuring receiver
Additional Equipment Required for 75 Ω RF Out

Adapter, Type-N (f) to BNC (m), 75 Ω
Procedure
following keys:
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, Zero Span
288 Chapter 9
Figure 9-24 Absolute Amplitude, Vernier, and Power Sweep Accuracy Test
Setup

3. Connect the 100 kHz to 1500 MHz power sensor to the RF Out 50 Ω
as shown in Figure 9-24.
75 Ω RF Out only: Connect the power sensor to the RF Out 75 Ω as
shown in Figure 9-24.
4. On the spectrum analyzer, press:
Source Amptd, Amplitude, On Off (On), 0 dBm
(50 Ω RF Output only)
Source Amptd, Amplitude, On Off (On), +42.76 dBmV (75 Ω
RF Output only)
Single Sweep
Source Amptd, Attenuation Auto Man, 0 dB
5. Read the power level displayed on the measuring receiver and record
the result as TR Entry 1 of the performance verification test record
as the Absolute Amplitude Accuracy.
75 Ω RF Out only: Add 6 dB to the power level displayed on the
measuring receiver and record the result as TR Entry 1 of the
performance verification test record as the absolute accuracy.
Chapter 9 289
6. Press Ratio on the measuring receiver. Power levels now readout in

dB relative to the power level just measured at the 0 dBm output
power level setting.
7. Set the Source Amplitude to the settings indicated in Table 9-23. At
each setting, record the power level displayed on the measuring
receiver in Table 9-23.
8. Calculate the absolute vernier accuracy by subtracting the Source
Amplitude setting from the Measured Power Level for each Source
Amplitude setting in Table 9-23.
75 Ω RF Out only: Use the source amplitude settings for Option 1DN
analyzers.
Vernier Accuracy = Measured Power Level (dB) – Source Amplitude (dBm)
9. Locate the most positive and most negative absolute vernier
accuracy values for Source Amplitude levels of −1 dBm to −10 dBm
recorded in Table 9-23. Record in the performance verification test
record the Positive Vernier Accuracy as TR Entry 2 and the Negative
Vernier Accuracy as TR Entry 3.
75 Ω RF Out only: For source amplitudes of +41.76 dBmV to
+32.76 dBmV.
Positive Vernier Accuracy ____________ dB
Negative Vernier Accuracy ____________ dB
10.Locate the most positive and most negative Absolute Vernier
Accuracy values for all Source Amplitude levels in Table 9-23 and
record below.
Positive Power Sweep Accuracy ____________ dB
Negative Power Sweep Accuracy ____________ dB
11.Calculate the power sweep accuracy by subtracting the Negative
Power Sweep Accuracy recorded in the previous step from the
Positive Power Sweep Accuracy recorded in the previous step.
Record this value as TR Entry 4 of the performance verification test
record as the Power Sweep Accuracy.
Power Sweep Accuracy = Positive Power Sweep Accuracy – Negative Power Sweep Accuracy
290 Chapter 9
Table 9-23 Vernier Accuracy Worksheet
Source Amplitude Measured Vernier

Setting Power Level Accuracy
Option 1DN Option 1DQ

dBm dBmV (dB) (dB)
−1 +41.76
−2 +40.76
−3 +39.76
−4 +38.76
−5 +37.76
−6 +36.76
−7 +35.76
−8 +34.76
−9 +33.76
−10 +32.76
−11 +31.76
−12 +30.76
−13 +29.76
−14 +28.76
−15 +27.76
Chapter 9 291
22. Tracking Generator Level Flatness,

Options 1DN and 1DQ
A calibrated power sensor is connected to the tracking generator output
to measure the power level at 50 MHz. The measuring receiver is set for
RATIO mode so that future power level readings are in dB relative to
the power level at 50 MHz.
The tracking generator is then stepped to several frequencies
throughout its range. The output power difference relative to the power
level at 50 MHz is measured at each frequency and recorded.
For frequencies below 100 kHz, a digital voltmeter and precision 50 Ω
termination are used to measure the power of the tracking generator
output. The DVM is set to readout in dBm using the MATH function
with R value set to 50 Ω. The dBm equation used is:
E2
 ------ 
dBm = 10log  ------------- 
R
 1mW 
 
The DVM readout is corrected by making the readings relative to the
100 kHz reading from the power sensor.
Analyzers with 75 Ω tracking generators are only tested from 1 MHz to
1500 MHz.
Equipment Required
Measuring receiver
Power sensor, 100 kHz to 1.5 GHz
Digital voltmeter
50 Ω termination
BNC (f) to dual banana plug
Cable, BNC 91-cm (36-in)
Adapter, Type-N tee, (m)(f)(f)

292 Chapter 9

Figure 9-25 Tracking Generator Level Flatness Test Setup
Procedure
following keys:
Frequency, 50 MHz
CF Step Auto Man, 100 MHz
Span, Zero Span
Source Amptd, Amplitude On Off (On), 0 dBm (50 Ω RF Output only)
Source Amptd, Amplitude On Off (On), +42.76 dBmV

Single Sweep
2. Zero and calibrate the measuring receiver and 100 kHz to 1.5 GHz
the measuring receiver operation manual. Enter the power sensor
75 Ω RF Out only: Zero and calibrate the 75 Ω power sensor.
3. Connect the 100 kHz to 1.5 GHz power sensor to the RF Out 50 Ω.
Refer to Figure 9-25.
75 Ω RF Out only: Connect the 75 Ω power sensor through an adapter
to the RF Out 75Ω.
Chapter 9 293
4. Press RATIO on the measuring receiver. The measuring receiver

readout is now in power levels relative to the power level at 50 MHz.
5. Set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to 100 kHz. Press Single
Sweep.
75 Ω RF Out only: Set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to

1 MHz.
6. Enter the appropriate power sensor Cal Factor into the measuring
receiver as indicated in Table 9-24.
7. Record the power level displayed on the measuring receiver as the
Level Flatness in Table 9-24.
8. Repeat step 5 through step 7 to measure the flatness at each center
frequency setting listed in Table 9-24. The ↑ (step-up key) may be
used to tune to center frequencies above 100 MHz.
75 Ω RF Out only: Repeat step 5 through step 7 to measure the
flatness at the frequencies above 1 MHz listed in Table 9-24.
Table 9-24 Tracking Generator Level Flatness Worksheet
Center Level Flatness Cal Factor

Frequency (dB) (MHz)
100 kHza 0.1
300 kHza 0.3
500 kHza 0.3
1 MHz 1
2 MHz 3
5 MHz 3
10 MHz 10
20 MHz 30
40 MHz 50
50 MHz 0 (Ref) 50
80 MHz 100
100 MHz 100
200 MHz 300
300 MHz 300
400 MHz 300
500 MHz 300
294 Chapter 9
Center Level Flatness Cal Factor

Frequency (dB) (MHz)
600 MHz 300
700 MHz 1000
800 MHz 1000
900 MHz 1000
1000 MHz 1000
1100 MHz 1000
1200 MHz 1000
1300 MHz 1000
1400 MHz 1000
1500 MHz 2000
a. These frequencies do not apply to analyzers

with 75 Ω tracking generators.
75 RF Out only: Skip step 9 through step 14.

9. Disconnect the Power Sensor from the RF Out 50 Ω and connect the
equipment as shown in Figure 9-26.
Figure 9-26 Tracking Generator Level Flatness, Center Frequency ≤100 kHz
Chapter 9 295
10.Set the DVM to measure AC Volts. Press the following DVM keys so
that it reads out in dBm:
50 STORE 4 (sets resistance to 50 Ω for dBm calculation)
MATH 4 (sets DVM to read out in dBm)
11.Set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to 9 kHz and press

Single Sweep. Record the DVM readout in column 2 of Table 9-25.
12.Repeat step 11 for all center frequencies listed in Table 9-25.

Table 9-25 Tracking Generator Level Flatness Worksheet, 100 kHz
Center DVM Readout Corrected Level

Frequency dBm Flatness dB
9 kHz
20 kHz
40 kHz
60 kHz
80 kHz
100 kHz
13.Subtract the 100 kHz Level Flatness readout in Table 9-24 from the
100 kHz DVM Readout in Table 9-25 and record as the DVM Offset
at 100 kHz.
DVM Offset ____________ dB
For example, if the Level Flatness reading from Table 9-24 is
+0.7 dB and the DVM Readout from Table 9-25 is −0.53 dBm, the
DVM offset would be −1.23 dB.
DVM – Level Flatness = DVM Offset
14.Add the DVM Offset from step 13 to each of the DVM Readouts in
Table 9-25 and record as the Corrected Level Flatness in column 3.
For example, if the DVM Readout from Table 9-25 is +0.22 dBm, and
the DVM Offset is −1.23 dB, the corrected readout would be
−1.01 dB.
DVM + DVM Offset = Corrected Readout
15.Locate the most positive Level Flatness reading in Table 9-24 and
Table 9-25 for frequencies of 10 MHz and less and record this value
as TR Entry 1 of the performance verification test record.
75 Ω RF Out only: Do not use the data in Table 9-25.
296 Chapter 9
16.Locate the most negative Level Flatness reading in Table 9-24 and
Table 9-25 for frequencies of 10 MHz and less and record this value
as TR Entry 2 of the performance verification test record.
75 Ω RF Out only: Do not use the data in Table 9-25.
17.Locate the most positive Level Flatness reading in Table 9-24 for
frequencies greater than 10 MHz and record this value as TR Entry
3 of the performance verification test record.
18.Locate the most negative Level Flatness reading in Table 9-24 for
frequencies greater than 10 MHz and record this value as TR Entry
4 of the performance verification test record.
Chapter 9 297
23. Harmonic Spurious Outputs,

Options 1DN and 1DQ
The tracking generator output is connected to the input of a microwave
spectrum analyzer. The tracking generator is tuned to several different
frequencies and the amplitude of the second and third harmonics
relative to the fundamental are measured at each frequency.
Equipment Required
Spectrum analyzer, microwave

Pad, minimum loss
Figure 9-27 Harmonic Spurious Outputs Test Setup

298 Chapter 9
Procedure
following keys:
Frequency, 10 MHz
Span, Zero Span

Single Sweep
2. It is only necessary to perform the next step if more than two hours
have elapsed since a front-panel calibration of the microwave
spectrum analyzer was performed.
The microwave spectrum analyzer should be allowed to warm up for
at least 30 minutes before proceeding.
Perform a front-panel calibration of the microwave spectrum
analyzer by performing the following steps:
Note that the following steps are for an HP 8566A/B microwave
spectrum analyzer, the steps may be different if you are using
another microwave spectrum analyzer.
• Connect a BNC cable between CAL Output and RF Input.
• Press 2 − 22 GHz (INSTR PRESET), RECALL, 8. Adjust AMPTD CAL
for a marker amplitude reading of −10 dBm.
• Press RECALL, 9. Adjust FREQ ZERO for a maximum amplitude
response.
• Press SHIFT, Frequency SPAN to start the 30 second internal error
correction routine.
• Press SHIFT, START FREQ to use the error correction factors just
calculated.
3. Connect the Type-N cable from the tracking generator output to the
microwave spectrum analyzer RF Input as shown in Figure 9-27.
4. Set the microwave spectrum analyzer controls as follows:
CENTER FREQUENCY, 10 MHz
SPAN, 100 kHz
REFERENCE LEVEL, +5 dBm (50 Ω RF Output only)
REFERENCE LEVEL, 0 dBm (75 Ω RF Output only)
Chapter 9 299
RES BW, 30 kHz
LOG dB/DIV, 10 dB
CF STEP SIZE, 10 MHz
5. Set up the microwave spectrum analyzer by performing the

following steps:
• Press SIGNAL TRACK (On). Wait for the signal to be displayed at
center screen.
• Press Mkr → Ref Lvl.
• Press Peak Search, SIGNAL TRACK (Off), MARKER ∆
• Press CENTER FREQUENCY and the step-up key to tune to the
second harmonic. Press Peak Search. Record the marker
amplitude reading in Table 9-26 as the 2nd Harmonic Level for
the 10 MHz Tracking Generator Output Frequency.
• Perform this step only if the Tracking Generator Output
Frequency is less than 500 MHz. Press CENTER FREQUENCY and
the step-up key to tune to the third harmonic. Press Peak Search.
Record the marker amplitude reading in Table 9-26 as the 3rd
Harmonic Level for the 10 MHz Tracking Generator Output
Frequency.
• Press MARKER (Off).
6. Change the spectrum analyzer center frequency to the next
frequency listed in Table 9-26.
7. Change the microwave spectrum analyzer center frequency and
center frequency step size to the next frequency listed in Table 9-26,
then repeat step 5. Note that the microwave spectrum analyzer
frequency is the same as the Tracking Generator Output Frequency.
Table 9-26 Harmonic Spurious Responses Worksheet
Tracking 2nd 3rd

Generator Harmonic Harmonic
Frequency Level (dBc) Level (dBc)
10 MHz
100 MHz
300 MHz
750 MHz N/A
300 Chapter 9
8. Record the 10 MHz 2nd Harmonic Level in Table 9-26 as TR Entry 1

of the performance verification test record.
9. Locate the most positive 2nd Harmonic Level in Table 9-26 for
frequencies between 100 MHz and 750 MHz and record as
10.Record the 10 MHz 3rd Harmonic Level in Table 9-26 as TR Entry 3
of the performance verification test record.
11.Locate the most positive 3rd Harmonic Level in Table 9-26 for
frequencies between 100 MHz and 300 MHz and record as
Chapter 9 301
24. Non-Harmonic Spurious Outputs,

Options 1DN and 1DQ
The tracking generator output is connected to the input of a microwave
spectrum analyzer. The tracking generator is set to several different
output frequencies.
For each output frequency, several sweeps are taken on the microwave
spectrum analyzer over different frequency spans and the highest
displayed spurious response is measured in each span. Responses at
the fundamental frequency of the tracking generator output or their
harmonics are ignored. The amplitude of the highest spurious response
is recorded.
Equipment Required
Spectrum analyzer, microwave

Pad, minimum loss
Procedure
following keys:
Frequency, 50 MHz
Span, Zero Span

(75 Ω) RF Output only.

302 Chapter 9
Figure 9-28 Non-Harmonic Spurious Outputs Test Setup
2. On the spectrum analyzer, press Single Sweep.

It is only necessary to perform the next step if more than 2 hours have
elapsed since a front-panel calibration of the microwave spectrum
analyzer has been performed.
The microwave spectrum analyzer should be allowed to warm up for
at least 30 minutes before proceeding.
3. Perform a front-panel calibration of the microwave spectrum
analyzer by performing the following steps:
• Connect a BNC cable between CAL Output and RF Input.
• Press 2 − 22 GHz (INSTR PRESET), RECALL, 8. Adjust AMPTD CAL
for a marker amplitude reading of −10 dBm.
• Press RECALL, 9. Adjust FREQ ZERO for a maximum amplitude
response.
• Press SHIFT, FREQUENCY SPAN to start the 30 second internal
error correction routine.
• Press SHIFT, START FREQ to use the error correction factors just
calculated.
Chapter 9 303
Measuring Fundamental Amplitudes

4. Connect the Type-N cable from the tracking generator output to the
microwave spectrum analyzer RF Input as shown in Figure 9-28.
5. Set the spectrum analyzer center frequency to the Fundamental
Frequency listed in Table 9-27.
6. Set the microwave spectrum analyzer controls as follows:
SPAN, 100 kHz
REFERENCE LEVEL, +5 dBm (50 Ω RF Out only)
REFERENCE LEVEL, 0 dBm (75 Ω RF Out only)
ATTEN, 20 dB
LOG dB/DIV, 10 dB
7. Set the microwave spectrum analyzer CENTER FREQUENCY to

the Fundamental Frequency listed in Table 9-27.
8. On the microwave spectrum analyzer, press Peak Search. Press
MARKER →REF LVL. Wait for another sweep to finish.
9. Record the microwave spectrum analyzer marker amplitude reading

Table 9-27 as the Fundamental Amplitude.
10.Repeat step 5 through step 9 for all Fundamental Frequency
settings Table 9-27.
Table 9-27 Fundamental Response Amplitudes Worksheet
Fundamental Fundamental
Frequency Amplitude (dBm)
10 MHz
750 MHz
1.5 GHz
Measuring Non-Harmonic Responses

11.On the spectrum analyzer, set the center frequency to 10 MHz.
12.Set the microwave spectrum analyzer Start Freq, Stop Freq, and Res
BW as indicated in the first row of Table 9-28.
75 Ω outputs only: Measure only at start frequencies of 1 MHz and
greater.
13.Press SINGLE on the microwave spectrum analyzer and wait for the
sweep to finish. Press Peak Search.
304 Chapter 9
14.Verify that the marked signal is not the fundamental or a harmonic

of the fundamental by performing the following steps:
a. Divide the marker frequency by the fundamental frequency (the
spectrum analyzer center frequency setting). For example, if the
marker frequency is 30.3 MHz and the fundamental frequency is
10 MHz, dividing 30.3 MHz by 10 MHz yields 3.03.
b. Round the number calculated in step a to the nearest whole
number. In the example above, 3.03 should be rounded to 3.
c. Multiply the fundamental frequency by the number calculated in
step b. Following the example, multiplying 10 MHz by 3 yields
30 MHz.
d. Calculate the difference between the marker frequency and the
frequency calculated in step c above. Continuing the example, the
difference would be 300 kHz.
e. Due to span accuracy uncertainties in the microwave spectrum
analyzer, the marker frequency might not equal the actual
frequency. Given the marker frequency, check if the difference
calculated in step d is within the appropriate tolerance:
For marker frequencies <5 MHz, tolerance = ±200 kHz
For marker frequencies <55 MHz, tolerance = ±750 kHz
For marker frequencies >55 MHz, tolerance = ±10 MHz
f. If the difference in step d is within the indicated tolerance, the
signal in question is the fundamental signal (if the number in
step b = 1) or a harmonic of the fundamental (if the number in
step b >1). This response should be ignored.
15.Verify that the marked signal is a true response and not a random
noise peak by pressing SINGLE to trigger a new sweep and press Peak
Search. A true response will remain at the same frequency and
amplitude on successive sweeps but a noise peak will not.
If the marked signal is not the fundamental or a harmonic of the
fundamental (see step 14) and is a true response (see step 15), proceed
with step 17.
16.If the marked signal is either the fundamental or a harmonic of the
fundamental (see step 14) or a noise peak (see step 15), move the
marker to the next highest signal by pressing SHIFT, Peak Search.
Repeat step 14.
The following step is only performed if the marker signal is not the
fundamental or harmonic of the fundamental and is a true response.
Chapter 9 305
17.Calculate the difference between the amplitude of marked signal

and the fundamental amplitude as listed in Table 9-27.
For example, if the fundamental amplitude for a fundamental
frequency of 10 MHz is +1.2 dBm and the marker amplitude is
−40.8 dBm, the difference is −42 dBc.
Record this difference as the non-harmonic response amplitude for the
appropriate spectrum analyzer center frequency and microwave
spectrum analyzer start and stop frequency settings in Table 9-28.
Non-Harmonic Amplitude = Marker Amplitude – Fundamental Amplitude
18.If a true non-harmonic spurious response is not found, record
“NOISE” as the non-harmonic response amplitude in Table 9-28 for
the appropriate spectrum analyzer center frequency and microwave
spectrum analyzer start and stop frequency settings.
19.Repeat step 13 through step 18 for the remaining microwave
spectrum analyzer settings for start frequency, stop frequency, and
resolution bandwidth; and for the spectrum analyzer center
frequency setting of 10 MHz.
20.Repeat step 12 through step 19 with the spectrum analyzer center
frequency set to 750 MHz.
21.Repeat step 12 through step 19 with the spectrum analyzer center
frequency set to 1.5 GHz.
22.Locate in Table 9-28 the most-positive non-harmonic response
amplitude. Record this amplitude as the highest non-harmonic
response amplitude in TR Entry 1 of the performance verification
test record.
Table 9-28 Non-Harmonic Responses Worksheet
Microwave Spectrum
Non-Harmonic Response Amplitude (dBc)
Analyzer Settings
Start Stop Resolution at 10 MHz at 750 MHz at 1.5 GHz

Freq Freq Bandwidth Center Freq Center Freq Center Freq
(MHz) (MHz)
9 kHza 0.1a 300 Hza
0.1b 5.0 10 kHz
5.0 55 100 kHz
55 1240 1 MHz
1240 1500 1 MHz
a. 75 Ω RF outputs: Omit this frequency range.

b. 75 Ω RF outputs: Set the start frequency to 1 MHz.
306 Chapter 9
10 Performance Verification Test
Record
307
Performance Verification Test Record
HP ESA-L1500A Performance Verification Test Record
HP ESA-L1500A Performance Verification

Test Record
Table 10-1 HP ESA-L1500A Performance Verification Test Record
Address: _____________________________________ Report No. ______________________
_____________________________________________ Date ___________________________
_____________________________________________
Model HP ESA-L1500A
Serial No. ___________________ Ambient temperature _______ °C
Options _____________________ Power mains line frequency ______ Hz

(nominal)
Firmware Revision ____________ Relative humidity _______ %
Customer ____________________________________ Tested by _______________________________
Test Equipment Used:
Description Model No. Trace No. Cal Due Date
Synthesized sweeper ___________ ___________ ___________
Synthesizer/function ___________ ___________ ___________

generator
Synthesized signal generator ___________ ___________ ___________
Measuring receiver ___________ ___________ ___________
75 Ω termination ___________ ___________ ___________

RF power sensor ___________ ___________ ___________
Low-power power sensor ___________ ___________ ___________
75 Ω power sensor ___________ ___________ ___________
1 dB step attenuator ___________ ___________ ___________
10 dB step attenuator ___________ ___________ ___________
Universal frequency counter ___________ ___________ ___________
Frequency standard ___________ ___________ ___________
Power splitter ___________ ___________ ___________
50 MHz low pass filter ___________ ___________ ___________
50 Ω termination ___________ ___________ ___________
308 Chapter 10
Power meter ___________ ___________ ___________
Microwave spectrum ___________ ___________ ___________

analyzer (Option 1DN only)
Notes/comments: _____________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________
Table 10-2 HP ESA-L1500A Performance Verification Test Record
Model HP ESA-L1500A Report No. ___________
Serial No. ___________ Date ___________
Results Measurement
Test Description Minimum Maximum
Measured Uncertainty
1. 10 MHz Reference Frequency Error

Accuracy
Settability −5 Hz (1) ___________ +5 Hz ±18.6 mHz
2. Resolution Bandwidth
3 kHz 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref)
1 kHz −0.4 dB (1) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.093 dB
10 kHz −0.4 dB (2) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.093 dB
30 kHz −0.4 dB (3) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.093 dB
100 kHz −0.4 dB (4) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.093 dB
300 kHz −0.4 dB (5) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.093 dB
1 MHz −0.4 dB (6) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.093 dB
3 MHz −0.4 dB (7) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.093 dB
3. Noise Sidebands
Suppression at 10 kHz (1) ___________ −90 dBc/Hz ±1.31 dB
Chapter 10 309
Serial No. ___________ Date ___________
Results Measurement
4. System Related
Sidebands
Sideband Below Signal (1) ___________ −65 dBc ±1.31 dB
Sideband Above Signal (2) ___________ −65 dBc ±1.31 dB
5. Residual FM
(1) ___________ 150 Hz ±11.67 Hz
6. Frequency Span
Readout Accuracy
Span Mkr∆ Reading
1500 MHz 1185.00 MHz (1) ___________ 1215.00 MHz ±6.12MHz
100 MHz 79 MHz (2) ___________ 81 MHz ±408 kHz
100 kHz 79 kHz (3) ___________ 81 kHz ±408 Hz
100 MHz 79 MHz (4) ___________ 81 MHz ±408 kHz
100 kHz 79 kHz (5) ___________ 81 kHz ±408 Hz
100 MHz 79 MHz (6) ___________ 81 MHz ±408 kHz
100 kHz 79 kHz (7) ___________ 81 kHz ±408 Hz
7. Reference Level
Accuracy
Log Mode
Reference Level
dBm dBmV
−30 +21.76 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref)
−20 +31.76 −0.40 dB (1) ___________ +0.40 dB ±0.194 dB
−10 +41.76 −0.50 dB (2) ___________ +0.50 dB ±0.194 dB
−40 +11.76 −0.40 dB (3) ___________ +0.40 dB ±0.206 dB
−50 +1.76 −0.50 dB (4) ___________ +0.50 dB ±0.206 dB
310 Chapter 10
Serial No. ___________ Date ___________
Results Measurement
−60 −8.24 −0.60 dB (5) ___________ +0.60 dB ±0.206 dB
−70 −18.24 −1.00 dB (6) ___________ +1.00 dB ±0.206 dB
−80 −28.24 −1.10 dB (7) ___________ +1.10 dB ±0.206 dB
−90 −38.24 −1.20 dB (8) ___________ +1.20 dB ±0.206 dB
Linear Mode
Reference Level
dBm dBmV
−30 +21.76 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref)
−20 +31.76 −0.40 dB (9) ___________ +0.40 dB ±0.194 dB
−10 +41.76 −0.50 dB (10) ___________ +0.50 dB ±0.194 dB
−40 +11.76 −0.40 dB (11) ___________ +0.40 dB ±0.206 dB
−50 +1.76 −0.50 dB (12) ___________ +0.50 dB ±0.206 dB
−60 −8.24 −0.60 dB (13) ___________ +0.60 dB ±0.206 dB
−70 −18.24 −1.00 dB (14) ___________ +1.00 dB ±0.206 dB
−80 −28.24 −1.10 dB (15) ___________ +1.10 dB ±0.206 dB
−90 −38.24 −1.20 dB (16) ___________ +1.20 dB ±0.206 dB
8. Scale Fidelity
Log Mode
dB from Ref Level Cumulative Error
0 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref)
−4 −4.34 dB (1) ___________ −3.66 dB ±0.165 dB
−8 −8.38 dB (2) ___________ −7.62 dB ±0.133 dB
−12 −12.42 dB (3) ___________ −11.58 dB ±0.133 dB
−16 −16.46 dB (4) ___________ −15.54 dB ±0.133 dB
−20 −20.50 dB (5) ___________ −19.50 dB ±0.132 dB
Chapter 10 311
Serial No. ___________ Date ___________
Results Measurement
−24 −24.54 dB (6) ___________ −23.46 dB ±0.133 dB
−28 −28.58 dB (7) ___________ −27.42 dB ±0.133 dB
−32 −32.62 dB (8) ___________ −31.38 dB ±0.133 dB
−36 −36.66 dB (9) ___________ −35.34 dB ±0.133 dB
−40 −40.70 dB (10) ___________ −39.30 dB ±0.132 dB
−44 −44.74 dB (11) ___________ −43.26 dB ±0.133 dB
−48 −48.78 dB (12) ___________ −47.22 dB ±0.133 dB
−52 −52.82 dB (13) ___________ −51.18 dB ±0.133 dB
−56 −56.86 dB (14) ___________ −55.14 dB ±0.149 dB
−60 −60.90 dB (15) ___________ −59.10 dB ±0.149 dB
−64 −64.94 dB (16) ___________ −63.06 dB ±0.150 dB
−68 −68.98 dB (17) ___________ −67.02 dB ±0.150 dB
−72 −73.02 dB (18) ___________ −70.98 dB ±0.150 dB
−76 −77.06 dB (19) ___________ −74.94 dB ±0.150 dB
−80 −81.10 dB (20) ___________ −78.90 dB ±0.149 dB
−84 −85.14 dB (21) ___________ −82.86 dB ±0.150 dB
Log Mode
dB from Ref Level Incremental Error
0 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref)
−4 −0.4 dB (22) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.165 dB
−8 −0.4 dB (23) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.133 dB
−12 −0.4 dB (24) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.133 dB
−16 −0.4 dB (25) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.133 dB
−20 −0.4 dB (26) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.132 dB
−24 −0.4 dB (27) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.133 dB
312 Chapter 10
Serial No. ___________ Date ___________
Results Measurement
−28 −0.4 dB (28) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.133 dB
−32 −0.4 dB (29) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.133 dB
−36 −0.4 dB (30) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.133 dB
−40 −0.4 dB (31) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.132 dB
−44 −0.4 dB (32) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.133 dB
−48 −0.4 dB (33) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.133 dB
−52 −0.4 dB (34) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.133 dB
−56 −0.4 dB (35) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.149 dB
−60 −0.4 dB (36) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.149 dB
−64 −0.4 dB (37) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.150 dB
−68 −0.4 dB (38) ___________ +0.4 dB ±0.150 dB
Linear Mode
dB from Ref Level
0 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref) 0 (Ref)
−4 −3.0% (39) ___________ +3.0% ±1.21%
−8 −3.0% (40) ___________ +3.0% ±0.63%
−12 −3.0% (41) ___________ +3.0% ±0.40%
−16 −3.0% (42) ___________ +3.0% ±0.22%
−20 −3.0% (43) ___________ +3.0% ±0.16%
9. Input Attenuation
Attenuation
0 −0.30 dB (1) ___________ +0.30 dB ±0.192 dB
5 −0.30 dB (2) ___________ +0.30 dB ±0.192 dB
15 −0.30 dB (3) ___________ +0.30 dB ±0.179 dB
Chapter 10 313
Serial No. ___________ Date ___________
Results Measurement
20 −0.30 dB (4) ___________ +0.3 dB ±0.179 dB
25 −0.35 dB (5) ___________ +0.35 dB ±0.179 dB
30 −0.40 dB (6) ___________ +0.40 dB ±0.179 dB
35 −0.45 dB (7) ___________ +0.45 dB ±0.179 dB
40 −0.50 dB (8) ___________ +0.50 dB ±0.179 dB
45 −0.55 dB (9) ___________ +0.55 dB ±0.179 dB
50 −0.60 dB (10) ___________ +0.60 dB ±0.179 dB
55 −0.65 dB (11) ___________ +0.65 dB ±0.179 dB
60 −0.70 dB (12) ___________ +0.70 dB ±0.179 dB
10. Resolution Bandwidth

Accuracy
3 dB Resolution
Bandwidth
3 MHz 2.4 MHz (1) ___________ 3.6 MHz ±33 kHz
1 MHz 0.8 MHz (2) ___________ 1.2 MHz ±11 kHz
300 kHz 240 kHz (3) ___________ 360 kHz ±3.3 kHz
100 kHz 80 kHz (4) ___________ 120 kHz ±1.1 kHz
30 kHz 24 kHz (5) ___________ 36 kHz ±330 Hz
10 kHz 8 kHz (6) ___________ 12 kHz ±110 Hz
3 kHz 2.4 kHz (7) ___________ 3.6 kHz ±33 Hz
1 kHz 0.8 kHz (8) ___________ 1.2 kHz ±11 Hz
314 Chapter 10
Serial No. ___________ Date ___________
Results Measurement
11. Frequency Readout

Accuracy and Marker
Count Accuracy
Frequency Readout Frequency (MHz)

Accuracy
Span
10 MHz 1.48988 (1) ___________ 1.49012 0 Hz
100 kHz 1.4899988 (2) ___________ 1.4900012 0 Hz
Marker Count Accuracy
Counter Resolution 1 Hz 1.489999999 (3) ___________ 1.490000001 0 Hz
12. Absolute Amplitude

Accuracy
−0.30 dB (1) ___________ +0.30 dB ±0.131 dB
Max Positive Response (1) ___________ +0.75 dB ±0.284 dB

(20 to 30 °C)
Max Negative Response −0.75 dB (2) ___________ ±0.284 dB

(20 to 30 °C)
Max Positive Response (0 (1) ___________ +1.0 dB ±0.284 dB

to 55 °C)
Max Negative Response (0 −1.0 dB (2) ___________ ±0.284 dB
to 55 °C)
Chapter 10 315
Serial No. ___________ Date ___________
Results Measurement
Second Harmonic (1) ___________ −55 dBc ±1.41 dB

Distortion
Third Order
Intermodulation
Distortion, 50 Ω Input
50 MHz (2) ___________ +7 dBm ±1.02 dB
900 MHz (3) ___________ +7 dBm ±1.02 dB
1450 MHz (4) ___________ +7 dBm ±1.02 dB
Third Order
Intermodulation
Distortion, 75 Ω Input
50 MHz (5) ___________ +59.46 dBmV ±1.02 dB
900 MHz (6) ___________ +59.46 dBmV ±1.02 dB
1450 MHz (7) ___________ +57.76 dBmV ±1.02 dB
(1) ___________ 1.0 dB ±0.22 dB
16. Other Input Related

Spurious Responses
542.8 MHz (1) ___________ −65 dBc ±1.22 dB
510.7 MHz (2) ___________ −65 dBc ±1.22 dB
1310.7 MHz (3) ___________ −45 dBc ±1.22 dB
Sweep Time Mkr∆ Reading
20 ms 15.8 ms (1) ___________ 16.2 ms ±104.5 µs
100 ms 79.0 ms (2) ___________ 81.0 ms ±523 µs
1s 790.0 ms (3) ___________ 810.0 ms ±5.23 ms
10 s 7.90 s (4) ___________ 8.10 s ±52.3 ms
316 Chapter 10
Serial No. ___________ Date ___________
Results Measurement
18. Displayed Average

Noise Level
Frequency (50 Ω Input)
400 kHz (1) ___________ −115 dBm ±1.51 dB
1 MHz to 10 MHz (2) ___________ −115 dBm ±1.51 dB
10 MHz to 500 MHz (3) ___________ −120 dBm ±1.51 dB
500 MHz to 1.2 GHz (4) ___________ −116 dBm ±1.51 dB
1.2 GHz to 1.5 GHz (5) ___________ −113 dBm ±1.51 dB
Frequency (75 Ω Input)
1 MHz to 10 MHz (6) ___________ −63 dBmV ±1.51 dB
10 MHz to 500 MHz (7) ___________ −65 dBmV ±1.51 dB
500 MHz to 1.0 GHz (8) ___________ −60 dBmV ±1.51 dB
1.0 GHz to 1.5 GHz (9) ___________ −53 dBmV ±1.51 dB
150 kHz to 1.5 GHz (1) ___________ −90 dBm ±1.12 dB

(50 Ω Input)
1 MHz to 1.5 GHz (1) ___________ −36 dBmV ±1.12 dB

(75 Ω Input)
20. Tracking Generator

Feedthrough
Option 1DN only:
≤ 1 MHz (1) ___________ −116 dBm ±1.51 dB
> 1 MHz to ≤500 MHz (2) ___________ −120 dBm ±1.51 dB
> 500 MHz to ≤1.2 GHz (3) ___________ −116 dBm ±1.51 dB
> 1.2 GHz to ≤1.5 GHz (4) ___________ −113 dBm ±1.51 dB
Chapter 10 317
Serial No. ___________ Date ___________
Results Measurement
Option 1DQ only:
> 1 MHz to ≤500 MHz (5) ___________ −65 dBmV ±1.51 dB
> 500 MHz to ≤1.0 GHz (6) ___________ −61 dBmV ±1.51 dB
> 1.0 GHz to ≤1.5 GHz (7) ___________ −55 dBmV ±1.51 dB
21. Absolute Amplitude,

Vernier, and Power
Sweep Accuracy
Option 1DN and 1DQ only:
Absolute Amplitude −0.5 dB (1) ___________ +0.5 dB ±0.14 dB

Accuracy
Positive Vernier Accuracy (2) ___________ +0.75 dB ±0.19 dB
Negative Vernier Accuracy −0.75 dB (3) ___________ ±0.19 dB
Power Sweep Accuracy (4) ___________ 1.5 dB ±0.19 dB
22. Tracking Generator

Level Flatness
Maximum Flatness, (1) ___________ +2.0 dB ±0.58 dB

≤ 10 MHz
Minimum Flatness, −2.0 dB (2) ___________ ±0.58 dB

≤10 MHz
Maximum Flatness, (3) ___________ +1.5 dB ±0.24 dB
>10 MHz
Minimum Flatness, −1.5 dB (4) ___________ ±0.24 dB

>10 MHz
318 Chapter 10
Serial No. ___________ Date ___________
Results Measurement
23. Harmonic Spurious

Outputs
Option 1DN only:
2nd Harmonic Level

9 kHz to 20 MHz (1) ___________ −20 dBc ±1.50 dB
20 MHz to 1.5 GHz (2) ___________ −25 dBc ±1.50 dB
3rd Harmonic Level

9 kHz to 20 MHz (3) ___________ −20 dBc ±1.50 dB
20 MHz to 1.5 GHz (4) ___________ −25 dBc ±1.50 dB
Option 1DQ only:
2nd Harmonic Level

1 MHz to 20 MHz (1) ___________ −20 dBc ±1.50 dB
20 MHz to 1.5 GHz (2) ___________ −25 dBc ±1.50 dB
3rd Harmonic Level

1 MHz to 20 MHz (3) ___________ −20 dBc ±1.50 dB
20 MHz to 1.5 GHz (4) ___________ −25 dBc ±1.50 dB
24. Non-Harmonic
Spurious Outputs
Highest Non-Harmonic (1) ___________ −35 dBc ±1.79 dB

Response Amplitude
Chapter 10 319
320 Chapter 10
Index
Symbols Amplitude key, 29 Clear Write C, 112

% AM On Off, 91 Amplitude menu map, 117 clock
(Local) key, 105 amplitude menus, 66 setup, 105
amplitude modulation, 91 Color Printing On Off, 109
Numerics Amplitude On Off, 100 commands
amplitude scale, 66 front panel execution, 77
10 MHz REF INPUT, 35 amplitude units, 67 Commercial calibration with test
10 MHz REF OUTPUT, 35 Amptd Offset, 101 data, 139
3 dB bandwidth measurement, 91 Amptd Step Auto Man, 100 configuration
50 MHz osc On Off, 106 Amptd Units, 67 default, 107
50 ohm RF bridge, 141 analyzer battery, 45 connector
50 ohm/75 ohm minimum loss annotation, 36 10 MHz ref input, 35
pad, 141 Annotation On Off, 77 10 MHz ref output, 35
75 ohm matching transformer, arrow keys, 32 aux if output, 35
141 Attenuation Auto Man, 66, 100 aux video output, 34
75 ohm RF bridge, 141 attenuator ext trig input, 34
tracking generator, 100 external keyboard, 30
A Auto Align, 106 hi sweep in, 34
AC power source, 142 Auto Couple, 70 hi sweep out, 34
AC probe, 142 automatic alignment, 18, 106 HP-IB, 34
Accessories, 141 AUX IF OUT, 35 INPUT 50 ohm, 31
accessories AUX VIDEO OUT, 34 parallel interface, 34
AC power source, 142 probe power, 30
AC probe, 142 B RF OUT 50 ohm, 31
broadband preamplifiers, 142 bandwidth measurement, 91 RS-232, 34
carrying strap, 143 bandwidth ratio service, 35
external keyboard, 143 video bandwidth to resolution continuous sweep, 104
HP-IB cable, 143 bandwidth, 72 Contrast, 77
parallel interface cable, 143 battery correction factors, 106
printer, 143 analyzer, 45 coupled functions menu, 70
rechargable battery, 142 battery, rechargable, 142 coupled sweep time, 104
RF bridge, 141 Baud Rate, 108 coupling video bandwidth, 72
RF limiters, 141 Benchlink software, 140 CSA mark, 177
RS-232 cable, 143 Blank A, B, or C, 112
transient limiters, 141 Bottom Margin, 108 D
accessories shipped with the Brightness keys, 71 data controls, 31
analyzer, 12 brightness keys, 29 data entry keys, 30
active function, 39 broadband preamplifiers, 142 data keys, 32
address BW/Avg, 72 date display, 105
printer, 108 BW/Avg menu map, 117 Datemode MDY DMY, 105
Align Now, 106 DC probes
alignment C use of, 142
ADC, LO, IF, RF, All, 106 Default Config, 107
load default values, 107 Canadian Standards Association,
177 Define Printer, 108
Alignments, 106 Del Segment, 90
All but RF, 106 CE mark, 177
Center Freq, 83 Delete, 81
Ampcor, 67 delete files, 81
Ampcor On Off, 67 center frequency, 83
center-frequency step size, 83 delete limit-line segment, 90
amplifiers, 142 Delete Limits, 90
AMPLITUDE, 66 CF Step Auto Man, 83
CF step size, 98 Delete Now, 81
Amplitude, 40 Delete Point, 68
amplitude correction factors Change Title, 76
checking the basics, 49 delete point, 81
delete point, 68 delete state, 81
on or off, 67 checking the fuse, 13
clear memory, 81 delete trace, 81
select amplitude, 68 Demod, 74
Amplitude Correction Menu Clear Title, 77
Clear Write A, 110 demodulation, 74, 75
Keys, 67 speaker on off, 74
Clear Write B, 111
Index 321
Index
demodulation functions, 74 Free Run, 115 parallel, 108

Det/Demod, 74 Freq Correct On Off, 106 serial, 108
Det/Demod menu map, 117 Freq Count, 82 interface selection, 108
detection mode Freq Count menu map, 122 internal alignment routine, 44
negative peak, 74 Freq Offset, 83 internal alignment signal, 40
positive peak, 74 Frequency, 40, 83 50 MHz, 106
sample, 74 frequency Internal Lock On Off, 81
Detector, 74 stop, 83 Inverse Video On Off, 77
detector functions, 74 frequency and amplitude ISM 1-A symbol, 177
Display, 76 self-calibration routine, 19
display brightness, 71 frequency correction, 106 K
display contrast, 77 frequency counter function, 30 key overview, 39
display line, 76 Frequency key, 29 keyboard
Display Line On Off, 76 Frequency menu map, 122 external connector, 30
Display menu map, 117 frequency offset, 83 keys labeled on display, 29
display messages, 55 frequency span knob, 32
display title, 76 changing to full span, 102
down arrow key, 32 front panel execution of
L
Dwell Time On Off, 75 programming commands, 77
front panel features, 29 Last Span, 102
E Full Span, 102 Limit Display Y N Auto, 87
fuse, 13 limit lines
earphone connector, 30 displaying, 87
Edit Limits, 88 fuse holder, 33
fuse location, 33 edit lower table, 88
Edit Lower, 88 edit table, 88
Enter key, 78 fixed and relative, 88
Erase Internal, 81 G
select frequency or time, 87
error messages, 55 Graticule On Off, 77 select type, 90
Esc key, 31, 79 testing, 87
Escape, 79 H Limit Test On Off, 87
escape key, 31 hardware error messages, 55 limiters
European Community hardware problems, 48 RF and transient, 141
trademark, 177 HI SWEEP IN, 34 Limits, 87
exchange trace A and B, 113 HI SWEEP OUT, 34 LIMITS FIX REL, 88
exchange trace B and C, 113 highest peak Limits Fixed Rel, 88
execute a command finding next, 97 Line, 115
front panel, 77 highest signal peak, 102 LINE front panel key, 31
Execute Title, 77 hold key, 31 line fuse, 33
Expand Off, 108 how to call Hewlett-Packard, 50 LINE switch, 31
Expand On, 108 how to return your analyzer for linear scale, 66
Ext Amp Gain, 68 service, 52 Load, 80
EXT TRIG IN, 34 HP Color Mode, 108 Load Defaults, 107
External, 115 HP-IB cable, 143 load files, 80
external keyboard, 143 HP-IB connector, 34 Load key, 30
external keyboard connector, 30 Load Now, 80
External preamplifier, 68 log scale, 66
I
external reference, 18 lower limit line
informational messages, 55
initial inspection, 12 editing, 88
F
INPUT 50 ohm, 31
features input attenuation control, 66 M
front panel, 29 Input impedance, 68 making a measurement, 40, 42
File key, 30, 80 input power manuals
File menu map, 117 overload protection, 56, 58 extra users and calibration
firmware date, 18 Input Z Corr 50 75, 68 guide (Option 910), 139
fixed, limit line type, 88 instrument preset, 30, 94 Marker, 41, 85
Flat, 90 interface marker
Form Feed, 109 HP-IB, 108 selection, 85
format date, 105
322 Index
Index
trace selection, 86 N service documentation, 139

Marker # On Off, 86 N db Points On Off, 91 tracking generator, 137
Marker All Off, 86 naming of files, 80 tracking generator 50 ohm, 137
marker control keys, 85 negative peak detection mode, 74 tracking generator 75 ohm, 137
marker counter, 82 New Filename, 80 transit case, 136
resolution, 82 Next Peak, 97 Users and Calibration Guide,
Marker Counter On Off, 82 Next Pk Left, 97 139
Marker delta to span, 98 Next Pk Right, 97 options
marker keys, 30 noise level, 86 75 ohm, 137
Marker menu map, 122 Norm Ref Lvl, 114 output screen data, 96
marker noise, 86 Norm Ref Posn, 114 overload protection, 56, 58
Marker Noise On Off, 86 normal marker, 85 overview, keys and key menus, 39
Marker Normal, 41, 85 Normalize, 113
marker to center frequency, 97 Normalize On Off, 113 P
Marker to center frequency step, number/units keypad, 32 packaging, 52
98 parallel interface connector, 34
marker to reference level, 97 O peak
Marker to start, 98 next, 97
Marker to stop, 98 on/off switch, 31
Operations key, 113 next left, 97
Marker Trace Auto A B C, 86 next right, 97
marker tracking, 84 Option 0B1, 139
Option 0BX, 139 peak detection mode
Max Hold A or B, 112 positive/negative, 74
Max Mixer Lvl, 68 Option 1AX, 138
Option 1CP, 139 Peak Excursn, 97
maximum mixer level, 68 Peak Search, 41, 93
Measure, 87 Option 1D7, 138
Option 1DN, 137 Peak search, 97
Measure key, 29 Peak Search key, 30
Measure menu map, 125 Option 1DP, 137
Option A4H, 138 peak to center frequency, 97
menu keys, 29, 39 peak to peak measurement, 98
menu map Option A4J, 137
Option AYU, 136 percent amplitude modulation, 91
Amplitude, 117 Pk Threshold, 98
BW/Avg, 117 Option B70, 140
Option UK6, 139 Pk-Pk Search, 98
Det/Demod, 117 Point, 90
Display, 117 Option UK9, 138
Options, 136 point deletion, 68
File, 117 Port, 108
Freq Count, 122 12 Vdc power cable, 136
50 ohm to 75 ohm matching pad, HP-IB, 105
Frequency, 122 Serial, 106
Marker, 122 138
Benchlink software, 140 positive peak detection mode, 74
Measure, 125 power amplifiers, 142
Search, 126 carrying case, 136
Commercial calibration with power cable, 14
Source Amptd, 126 power input, 33
Span, 126 test data, 139
extra calibration guide, 139 Power On IP Last, 106
Sweep, 126 power on key, 31
System, 126 extra users guide, 139
front panel protective cover, 138 power requirements, 13
Trace, 132 Power Sweep On Off, 100
Trig, 133 HP-IB and parallel interface,
138 power-on state of spectrum
messages on screen, 55 analyzer, 106
Min Hold C, 112 IF, Sweep, and Video Inputs and
Outputs, 137 preamplifier gain, 68
Min Search, 98 preamplifiers, 142
minimum to marker, 98 operating case, 136
Option A5D Preferences, 77
mixer input level maximum, 68 Preset, 94
Mkr, 41 Option R12, 136
Option AXT, 136 Print key, 30, 96
Mkr Readout, 86 Print Softkeys On Off, 109
Modify Ampcor, 67 Option AYT, 136
rack mount kit with handles, printer, 143
monitor output, 33 HP Paintjet, 96
More key, 31, 92 139
RS-232 and parallel interface, Printer Addr, 108
move trace A into C, 113 printer address, 108
multipen plotter, 96 138
Screen capture software, 140 printer control, 30
Index 323
Index
Printer keys, 108 RF bridge, 141 source power, 100

printer port selection, 108 RF limiters, 141 Span, 40, 102
printer selection, 108 RF OUT 50 ohm, 31 span
printing, 96 RPG knob, 32 full, 102
printing, HP-IB RS-232 cable, 143 last, 102
address, 20 RS-232 interface connector, 34 zero, 102
paintjet, 20 span functions, 102
thinkjet, 20 S Span key, 29
printing, parallel sales and service offices, 50 Span menu map, 126
deskjet, 24 sample detection mode, 74 Span Zoom, 102
epson, 24 Save, 80 Speaker On Off, 74
laserjet, 24 save files, 80 speaker on/off control, 30
paintjet, 24 Save key, 30 speaker volume, 74
thinkjet, 24 Save Now, 81 speaker volume control, 30
printing, RS-232 Scale Type Log Lin, 66 spectrum analyzer attenuator, 66
baud rate, 22 Scale/Div, 66 spectrum analyzer auto-coupled
deskjet, 22 screen annotation, 36 sweep time, 104
epson, 22 on or off, 77 spectrum analyzer state recalled,
handshaking, 22 Screen capture software, 140 106
laserjet, 22 screen data output, 96 Standby key, 103
paintjet, 22 screen graticule, 77 start and stop frequencies, 98
parity, 22 screen messages, 55 Start Freq, 83
thinkjet, 22 screen title, 76 start frequency, 83
probe power connector, 30 Search key, 97 state of spectrum analyzer at
probes Search menu map, 126 power on, 106
AC and DC, 142 Segment, 89 step keys, 32
programming command Select Amptd, 68 step size, center frequency, 83
front panel execution, 77 Select Freq, 67 stimulus response mode, 104
Purge Ampcor, 68 Select Line Upper Lower, 88 Stop Freq, 83
Select Marker 1 2 3 4, 85 stop frequency, 83
R Select Point, 67 subtract display line from trace B,
ratio Select Printer, 108 113
video bandwidth to resolution service connector, 35 Sweep, 104
bandwidth, 72 service documentation Sweep Cont Single, 104
real-time clock Option 0BX, 139 sweep control
set date, 105 service key access, 108 continuous, 104
set time, 105 service options, 50 single, 104
rear panel features, 33 service requests, 60 Sweep menu map, 126
rear-panel battery information service tag, 52 sweep modes, 38
label, 45 Set Date, 105 sweep output connector
Ref Level, 66 Set Time, 105 SWEEP OUT, 34
Ref Lvl Offst, 67 setting the amplitude, 40 sweep time, 104
reference connector, 18 setting the center frequency, 40 Sweep Time Auto Man, 104
reference level, 66 setting the marker, 41 switch trace A and B, 113
reference level offset, 67 setting the span, 40 Swp Coupling SR SA, 104
relative, limit line type, 88 Show System, 107 System key, 30, 105
remote command signal peak System menu map, 126
front panel execution, 77 highest, 102
Remote Port HP-IB, 105 Signal Track On Off, 84 T
Remote Port Serial, 106 signal tracking, 84 temperature conditions, 18
Resolution, 108 signal-to-noise, 85 third order intercept
Resolution Auto Man, 82 Single Sweep, 99 measurement, 91
resolution bandwidth, 72 single sweep, 104 threshold line, 76, 98
Resolution BW Auto Man, 72 Slope, 90 Threshold On Off, 76
resolution of marker counter, 82 softkeys, 29 Time/Date, 105
returning your analyzer for Source Amptd, 100 Time/Date On Off, 105
service, 52 Source Amptd menu map, 126 Timebase, 107
324 Index
Index
timebase adjust View A, B, or C, 112

Fine, Coarse, 107 volume control, 30
timebase verification, 107
Title, 76 W
title entry, 76 warm-up, 18
TOI On Off, 91 warm-up time, 44
Top Margin, 108 warranty, 50
trace
clear write trace A, 110
X
move trace B into C, 113
Trace A B C, 110 X Axis Units Freq Time, 87
Trace key, 110
Trace menu map, 132 Z
trace modes, 38 Zero Span, 102
trace register contents, 113
trace registers
copying contents, 113
exchanging contents, 113
tracking generator
output power, 100
power sweep, 100
power sweep range, 100
source power offset, 100, 101
source power step size, 100
tracking generator functions, 100
transient limiter, 141
Trig key, 115
Trig menu map, 133
trigger
external, 115
free run, 115
line, 115
video, 115
trigger modes, 38
turning off markers, 86
turning on the analyzer for the
first time, 18
Type, 90
type of limit line, 90
U
units, amplitude, 67
up arrow key, 32
user configuration, 107
User Defined, 108
V
VBW/RBW Ratio, 72
VGA connector, 33
Video, 115
Video Average On Off, 72
video averaging, 72
video bandwidth, 72
video bandwidth to resolution
bandwidth ratio, 72
Video BW Auto Man, 72
video connector, 33
Index 325

About This Manual

Uploaded by

About This Manual

Uploaded by

About this Manual

Support for Your Product

HP References in this Manual

This manual may contain references to HP or Hewlett-Packard. Please note that

HP Part No. E4411-90056 Supersedes E4411-90054

© Copyright 1997, 1998, 1999 Hewlett-Packard Company

WARNING Warning denotes a hazard. It calls attention to a procedure

WARNING This is a Safety Class 1 Product (provided with a protective

WARNING If this product is not used as specified, the protection provided

The instruction documentation symbol. The product is marked

This symbol is used to mark the on position of the power line

This symbol indicates that the input power required is AC.

1. Preparing for Use and Printing

4. Front-Panel Key Reference

6. Options and Accessories

Commercial Calibration with Test Data

9. Performance Verification Tests

Equipment Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233

1.0 GHz). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

10. Performance Verification Test Record

WARNING To prevent electrical shock, disconnect the HP ESA-L1500A

Table 1-1 Accessories Supplied with the Spectrum Analyzer

Voltage 90 to 250 Vrms

Power Consumption, On less than 200 W

Power Consumption, less than 5 W

Table 1-3 DC Power Requirements

Power Consumption less than 175 W

a. 15 to 20 Vdc for serial prefix <US3745

Checking the Fuse

WARNING Failure to ground the spectrum analyzer properly can result in

Various power cables are available to connect the spectrum analyzer to

Table 1-4 Power Cables

8120-1351 Straight 229 (90) Mint Option 900

8120-1369 Straight 210 (79) Gray Option 901

8120-0696 90˚ 200 (78) Gray

8120-1378 Straight 203 (80) Jade Option 903

8120-4753 Straight 229 (90) Gray Option 918

8120-4754 90˚ 229 (90) Gray

8120-1689 Straight 200 (78) Mint Option 902

8120-2104 Straight 200 (78) Gray Option 906

8120-2296 90˚ 200 (78) Gray

8120-2956 Straight 200 (78) Gray Option 912

8120-2957 90˚ 200 (78) Gray

8120-4211 Straight 200 (78) Mint Option 917

8120-4600 90˚ 200 (78) Mint

8120-5182 Straight 200 (78) Jade Option 919

8120-5181 90˚ 200 (78) Jade

a. E = earth ground, L = line, and N = neutral.

CAUTION Ventilation Requirements: When installing the product in a cabinet, the

Turning on the Analyzer for the First Time

If you wish to use an external 10 MHz source as the reference

If your spectrum analyzer is equipped with Option A4H (HP-IB and

4. To meet spectrum analyzer specifications, allow a 5 minute warm-up

Printing with HP-IB

Printing Using an HP-IB Interface

Interconnection and Printing Instructions

Figure 1-1 ThinkJet Printer Switch Settings

4. Turn on the spectrum analyzer and printer.

Printer Addr (appears in the menu only when HP-IB is selected)

Printing with RS-232

Printing Using an RS-232 Interface

Interconnection and Printing Instructions

2. Connect the printer using an RS-232 cable.

Figure 1-2 9600 Baud Settings for Serial Printers

To set the spectrum analyzer baud rate to 9600, press:

Baud Rate (appears in the menu only when Serial is selected)

3. Select the printer configuration for your spectrum analyzer by

Printing With a Parallel Interface

Interconnection and Printing Instructions

6. Select the printer configuration for your spectrum analyzer by

How to Select a Printer

More (if necessary)

Resolution allows you to select the optimal resolution number to be

HP Color Mode DJ PJ Off

HP Color Mode allows you to select between DeskJet, PaintJet, or

What You’ll Find in this Chapter